Mercedes - E Class - Owners Manual - 2007 - 2007

Disclaimer All of the für following PDF document for this sich vehicle model Daslanguage folgende versions PDF-Dokument dieses Fahrzeugmodell bezieht in allen relate solely toversion vehicles intended for sale on the German which Sprachversionen nur aufofdie die für den deutschen Marktand bestimmt The following theFahrzeuge, Owner‘s Manual describes allmarket models, series and correspond to German regulations. sind undequipment die den deutschen Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte wenden Sie sich an special of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are Ihren autorisierten Mercedes-Benz Servicestützpunkt, um equipped ein gedrucktes possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be withExemplar all the Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz Service Centreand to obtain für andere Fahrzeugmodelle und affects Fahrzeugmodelljahre zu erhalten. described functions. This also safety-relevant systems functions. a printed version forauthorised other vehicle models and vehicle model years. Thislike PDF Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would document the latest version. Possible variations to your vehicle mayzu not Dieses PDF-Dokument stellt die Manual aktuelle Version dar. Mögliche Abweichungen to receive aisprinted Owner‘s for other vehicle models and vehicle be taken into account askönnten Mercedes-Benz constantlysein, updates their vehicles to Ihrem konkreten Fahrzeug nicht berücksichtigt da Mercedes-Benz model years. the state of the art and introduces changes design andanpasst, equipment. seine Fahrzeuge ständig dem neuesten Standinder Technik sowiePlease therefore that this PDF is document in no way replaces the version Änderungen in Form und Ausstattung vornimmt. Bitte beachten Sie daher, dass The onlinenote Owner‘s Manual the current and valid version. Itprinted is possible that which was affecting deliveredyour with yourFall vehicle. dieses PDF-Dokument in keinem das gedruckte ersetzt, mit deviations specific vehicle could Exemplar not be taken intodas account dem Fahrzeug ausgeliefert wurde. as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment. Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle. Copyright All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes. Internal use only Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, Thank you for choosing Mercedes-Benz. Before you drive off, familiarise yourself with your vehicle and read the Operating Instructions. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your vehicle and to avoid endangering yourself and others. Items of optional equipment are marked with an asterisk *. The equipment in your vehicle may vary, depending on the model, the ordered items, the country specifications and availability. The illustrations in this manual show a lefthand-drive vehicle. The arrangement of the switches, levers, stowage compartments, etc. will differ accordingly in a right-handdrive vehicle. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art and therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in design, equipment and technical features at any time. You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the data, illustrations or descriptions in this manual. Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you have any questions. The Owner’s Manual, Brief Instructions, Service Booklet and supplements specific to vehicle equipment belong with the vehicle. You should always keep them in the vehicle preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 1 Version: 2.9.4 and pass them on to the new owner if you sell the vehicle. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. i You can get to know the important fea- tures of your vehicle in German and in English in the interactive Owner's Manual on the Internet at: www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, Contents Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 2 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 2 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 3 Version: 2.9.4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 7G–TRONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) . . . . . 58 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 258, 269 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Acceleration Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Accident Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Active Service System see ASSYST PLUS ADAPTIVE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Adaptive damping system see ADS ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Airbag Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Driver's . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Sidebags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Windowbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Air cleaner Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Air conditioning 2-zone Thermatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 4-zone Thermotronic . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 169 Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Air-recirculation mode with convenience opening/closing feature . 176 Auxiliary heating/ventilation . . . . . 177 Controlling automatically . . . . . . . . 170 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 169 Demisting the windscreen . . . . . . . 174 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 283 Misted-up windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Setting the air distribution . . . . . . . 173 Setting the airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Setting the air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Setting the temperature . . . . . . . . . 170 Setting the temperature (rear compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Switching the residual heat function on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 see Climate control Airmatic DC (Dual Control) . . . . . . . . 156 Air pump, electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Ambient lighting Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 136 Antifreeze concentration . . . . . 389, 390 Anti-lock braking system see ABS Anti-theft alarm system see ATA Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 ASSYST PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) . . . . . . 62 Switching off the alarm . . . . . . . . . . 62 Audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . 292 AUTO lights Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Automatic transmission Changing gear yourself . . . . . . . . . 116 Display in the speedometer . . . . . . 115 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Emergency running mode . . . . . . . 297 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . 116 Program selector button . . . . . . . . 117 Releasing the parking lock manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . 115 Shift ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 3 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 4 Version: 2.9.4 Index Automatic transmission Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 304 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 133 Auxiliary ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Axle load, maximum permissible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370, 371, 372, 373, 374 B Ball coupling Folding in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Folding out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 BAS (Brake Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Battery Changing (auxiliary heating remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Changing (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Changing (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . . 310 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Checking (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Checking (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . . 310 Check lamp (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Check lamp (KEYLESS GO key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 310 Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Maintenance (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . 329 Reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 4 Removing/fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Voltage (on-board computer) . . . . . 127 Belt force limiters Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Belt reel (Easy-Pack fix kit) . . . . . . . . 203 Belt tensioners Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Bonnet Bonnet catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Bonnet release lever Release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Boot Emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Locking separately . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Opening/closing (manually) . . . . . . . 70 Boot/luggage compartment Opening/closing (automatically) . . . 73 Boot lid Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Brake Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Brake Assist see BAS Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Brake lamps Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Brake system Display message . . . . . . . . . . 268, 269 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Bulb Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 315 Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . 314 Licence plate lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 314 Parking lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Side lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Turn signal lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 see Lamp Bulbs Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 C Calling up a malfunction see Message memory menu Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plastic trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 245 248 246 245 248 247 246 246 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 5 Version: 2.9.4 Index Tail pipes (AMG vehicles) . . . . . . . . 247 Trailer tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 CD player/CD changer Operating (on-board computer) . . . 129 Central locking Automatic locking (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 From the luggage compartment (outside) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69 Central locking/unlocking button . . . 70 Central unlocking Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69 Centre console Lower section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Upper section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Changing a wheel see Flat tyre Child-proof locks Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Side windows (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Children Fastening seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Child seat Automatic recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Automatic recognition (malfunction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Suitable positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Cockpit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Collapsible wheel Pumping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 see separate operating instructions Constant headlamp mode Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 135 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 267, 271 Mixture ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Cornering light Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 143 265 186 D Dashboard see Cockpit see Instrument cluster Date Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . Daytime driving lights see Constant headlamp mode Delayed switch-off Exterior lighting (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior lighting (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel Low outside temperatures . . . . . . . Diesel engine Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dipped-beam headlamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 136 136 221 221 126 272 238 257 131 5 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 6 Version: 2.9.4 Index Service display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 up (AMG menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Distance warning function . . . . . . . . 149 Distance warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Cleaning the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Distance warning function . . . . . . . 149 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Door Automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Opening (from the inside) . . . . . . . . 69 Door control panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Drinks holder see Cup holder Driver's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Driver's door Unlocking (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . . 69 Driver's seat position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Driving safety system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6 ADAPTIVE BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Adaptive brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 59 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 EBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Driving system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 4MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Airmatic DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Driving tip Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . 238 Driving on wet roads . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 DVD audio Operating (on-board computer) . . . 129 DVD video Operating (on-board computer) . . . 130 Dynamic driving seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Selecting seat adjustment (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 E Easy-entry/exit feature Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Easy-entry feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Easy-exit feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Easy-Pack fix kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Easy-Pack stowage box . . . . . . . . . . 204 Easy-Pack system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 EBV (electronic brake-power distribution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Electrical/electronic equipment Retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Electronic brake-power distribution see EBV Electronic Stability Program see ESP® e mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Emergency engine starting . . . . . . . 339 Emergency key element Lost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Emergency locking Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Emergency running mode Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 297 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 7 Version: 2.9.4 Index Emergency unlocking Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Engine Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Running irregularly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Starting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Starting with KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . 111 Starting with the key . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Engine diagnostic warning lamp . . . 288 Engine electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Checking the oil level (dipstick) . . . 224 Checking the oil level (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 224, 277 Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Temperature display (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 60 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 60 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 260, 269 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 285 Exterior lighting Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Exterior mirror parking position Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 94 Exterior mirrors Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 92 Folding in/out (automatically) . . . . . 92 Folding in/out (electrically) . . . . . . . 91 Folding in when locking (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Parking position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 94 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Exterior view Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 F Fastening seat belts Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Flat tyre MOExtended run-flat system . . . . . 328 Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 317 TIREFIT kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Floormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Foglamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Folding bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Folding out/folding back . . . . . . . . . 87 Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Frequencies Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Front-passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 379, 380 Fuel filler flap Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Fuel line Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Fuel tank Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Range (on-board computer) . . . . . . 140 Fuse allocation chart . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Fuse box Boot/luggage compartment . . . . . 341 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 7 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 8 Version: 2.9.4 Index G Garage door Opening/closing (with the remote control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Clearing the memory . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Programming the remote control . . 214 Gear indicator (on-board computer) 126 Gearshift program Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts . . . . . 344 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Gross vehicle weight, maximum permissible . . . . 369, 371, 372, 373, 374 H Headlamp Misting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Headlamps Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Headlamps delayed switch-off see Exterior lighting delayed switch-off Head restraint Adjusting (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 80 Adjusting (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Luxury . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 81 8 NECK-PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Removing (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Head restraints Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Heating see Air conditioning High-pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . 245 HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 HomeLink® see Garage door opener I Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Indicator and warning lamp Brakes (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Distronic (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 286 Engine diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 285 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF . . . . 49, 283 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 289 Tyre pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . 289 Indicator and warning lamps . . . . . . 285 Indicator lamp see Indicator and warning lamp Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28 Selecting the language (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Intelligent Light System . . . . . . . . . . 103 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . 137 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Ambient (on-board computer) . . . . 136 Automatic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Reading lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Interior motion sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 ISOFIX child seat securing system . . 54 J Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 254 333 333 K Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 9 Version: 2.9.4 Index Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67 Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Modifying the programming . . . . . . . 66 KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Checking the battery . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Closing the boot lid automatically . . 74 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Losing the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Modifying the programming . . . . . . . 68 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Key positions Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 KEYLESS GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 119 L Lamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Lamps see Indicator and warning lamp Language Selecting (on-board computer) . . . 133 Lashing eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Licence plate lighting Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Lighting see Lights Lights Active light function . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . 100 Constant headlamp mode . . . . . . . . 99 Cornering light function . . . . . . . . . 103 Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . 99 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 104 Hazard warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . 102 Headlamp flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Headlamp range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Main-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 101 Motorway mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Rear foglamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Switching off (display message) . . . 275 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 LIM indicator lamp Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Load compartment load, maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370, 371, 372, 373, 374 Loading guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Locking Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 From the inside (central locking button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Luggage compartment enlargement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Luggage compartment floor extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . 193, 195 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 stowage well, under . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Luggage net Front-passenger footwell . . . . . . . . 190 Luggage well Removing/fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Lumbar support see Lumbar support Luxury head restraint . . . . . . . . . . 79, 81 M Main-beam headlamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Main fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Maintenance Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Malfunction memory see Message memory menu 9 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 10 Version: 2.9.4 Index Manual gearshift program . . . . . . . . 118 Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Massage function (PULSE) . . . . . . . . . 85 Maximum speed Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Operating (on-board computer) . . . 129 see separate operating instructions Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . 124 AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Message memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Resetting to factory settings . . . . . 132 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Submenu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Message see Display message see Indicator and warning lamp see Message memory menu Minispare emergency spare wheel Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 10 Mirror Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 see Exterior or rear-view mirror Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Own number sending . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Run-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 206 Telephone menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Modifying the programming Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 KEYLESS GO key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 MOExtended run-flat system* . 229, 328 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Operation (on-board computer) . . . 129 see separate operating instructions Multi-contour seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Multi-function display . . . . . . . . 120, 123 Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . 122 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 N Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Navigation menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 see separate operating instructions NECK-PRO head restraint . . . . . . . . . . 47 Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 O Oil Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil level Checking (dipstick) . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking (on-board computer) . . . On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convenience submenu . . . . . . . . . . Display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distronic menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic driving seat submenu . . . Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster submenu . . . . . Lighting submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message memory menu . . . . . . . . . 223 225 224 223 121 126 129 133 257 149 130 139 132 133 132 133 131 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 11 Version: 2.9.4 Index Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Standard display menu . . . . . . . . . 125 Telephone menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Time/date submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 TV menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Vehicle submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display . . . . . . 121 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Overhead control panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Own number sending (mobile phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 P Paint code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Panorama sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . 183 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Raising/lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Parking lamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Parking lock Releasing manually (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Parking position Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . 160 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Range of the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Warning display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 283 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Permanent four-wheel drive see 4MATIC Permanent Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . 154 Petrol Minimum grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Plastic hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Plastic trim Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Power supply (trailer) . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Power windows see Side window Pre-emptive occupant safety system see PRE-SAFE® PRE-SAFE® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 PRE-SAFE® System Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Program selector button Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 117 Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 R RACETIMER (on-board computer) . . 127 Radio Changing a station (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 see separate operating instructions Radio-controlled equipment Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Rain closing feature Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . 182 Rain sensor Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Range (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 140 R button see Reset button Rear bench seat Folding forward/back . . . . . . 195, 198 Rear foglamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Rear seat backrest Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 11 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 12 Version: 2.9.4 Index Rear-view mirror Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Anti-dazzle (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) . . . . . 92 Rear window Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Rear window blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Rear window heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 283 Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Replacing the wiper blade . . . . . . . 316 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Remote control Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Changing the batteries (auxiliary heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Programming (garage door opener) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . 315 Reserve Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Restraint system Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 12 Restraint System see SRS Restraint systems For children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Retaining hooks (boot) . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Reverse gear Engaging (automatic transmission) 115 Engaging (manual transmission) . . 115 Reversing lamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Roller sunblind Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Rear side window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Roof load, maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370, 371, 372, 373, 374 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Run-on time (mobile phone) . . . . . . . 212 S Safety net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Seat Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 78, 80 Correct driver's seat position . . . . . . 97 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Seat belt Adjusting the height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 290 Seat cushion Removing (rear bench seat) . . 197, 200 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Seat ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 282 Securing a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Selector lever Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Service Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Service display see ASSYST PLUS Service indicator see ASSYST PLUS Service products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . 390 Settings Calling up a stored setting . . . . . . . . 94 Factory (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67 Factory (KEYLESS GO) . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Factory (on-board computer) . . . . . 132 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 13 Version: 2.9.4 Index Shift ranges Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 116 Display in the speedometer . . . . . . 115 Sidebags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Side window Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Side windows Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Skibag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Rain closing feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Sliding sunroof see Panorama sliding/tilting sunroof see Sliding/tilting sunroof Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Socket Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Rear compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Spare wheel Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Spectacles compartment . . . . . . . . . 206 Speed Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Speed limiter Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Speedometer Digital speedometer (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Setting the unit (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Standard display (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Station see Radio Status line (on-board computer) . . . 123 Selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Steering wheel Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Buttons (on-board computer) . . . . . 122 Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Steering wheel gearshift paddles . . 118 Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 283 Stowage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Armrest (in front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Armrest (under) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Centre console (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Rear seat armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Stowage compartments Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Stowage space Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Stowage well Boot floor (underneath) . . . . . . . . . 192 underneath luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Submenu (on-board computer) . . . . 132 Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Dynamic driving seat . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Time/date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Summer opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Supplemental Restraint System see SRS Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Surround lighting Switching on/off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 13 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 14 Version: 2.9.4 Index Switching off the alarm ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 T Tailgate Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Limiting the opening angle . . . . . . . . 76 Opening/closing (manually) . . . . . . . 70 Tail lamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Technical data Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Trailer loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Telephone see Mobile phone Telescopic lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Telescopic rod (Easy-Pack fix kit) . . 204 Temperature Engine oil (on-board computer) . . . 126 Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 121 14 Thermatic Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 283 Thermotronic Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 283 Third brake lamp Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Through-loading feature . . . . . . . . . . 195 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Time Lap time (on-board computer) . . . . 127 Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 134 Setting the time (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Timer (on-board computer) . . . . . . . 127 TIREFIT kit Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Total distance recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29 Resetting the trip meter . . . . . . . . . 121 Tow-away protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Towing eye Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Trailer 7-pin connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Display message . . . . . . 268, 272, 273 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Trailer loads Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Trailer tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Notes on care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Trailer towing Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Transmission output (maximum) Telephone/two-way radio . . . . . . . 345 Transport (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Trip computer Menu (on-board computer) . . . . . . 139 Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Turn signal lamps Display message . . . . . . . . . . 273, 274 TV Operating (on-board computer) . . . 130 Two-way radio Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Tyre grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Calling up (on-board computer) . . 232 Display message . . . . . . . . . . 262, 278 Table (see Fuel filler flap) . . . . . . . . 219 see Tyre pressure Tyre pressure loss warning system 230 Tyre pressure monitor Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 15 Version: 2.9.4 Index Tyre pressures Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tyres Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 229 227 357 229 U Unit for distance Setting (on-board computer) . . . . . 133 Unladen weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369, 370, 372, 373, 374 Unlocking Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 306 From the inside (central unlocking button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Up (display message) . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 V Variable Speedtronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Vehicle Emergency unlocking . . . . . . . 306, 307 Individual settings (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Leaving parked up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Vehicle electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 347 Vehicle identification plates . . . . . . 346 Vehicle level Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Setting (AIRMATIC DC) . . . . . . . . . 156 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Vehicle weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 W Warning and indicator lamp ABS (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 LIM (Cruise control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 LIM (Distronic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 LIM (variable Speedtronic) . . . . . . . 152 Warning signal Audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Washer fluid Display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Wearing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Wheel bolts Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Wheel chock Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Wheels General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Interchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Windowbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Windows Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Cleaning the windscreen . . . . . . . . 246 Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Windscreen Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Infrared reflecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . 390 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 390 Windscreen washer reservoir Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . 390 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . 315 Winter diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 235 Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Limiting the speed (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 15 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 16 Version: 2.9.4 Introduction Protection of the environment Protection of the environment RDo H Environmental note RKeep Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. Our objectives are to use the natural resources which form the basis of our existence on this planet sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into consideration. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: ROperating conditions of your vehicle RYour personal driving style You can influence both factors. Therefore, please bear the following in mind: Operating conditions RAvoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption. RMake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. 16 not carry any unnecessary weight in the vehicle. an eye on the vehicle’s fuel consumption. RRemove roof racks once you no longer need them. RA regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. RAlways have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Personal driving style RDo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. RDo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. RDrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. RAvoid frequent, sudden acceleration. RChange gear in good time and only use each gear for up to 2 / 3 of its maximum engine speed. RSwitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Returning used vehicles Mercedes-Benz will take back your Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environmentally-responsible manner, in accordance with the European Union (EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive. The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to vehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle weight, in accordance with national regulations. For several years, Mercedes-Benz has been meeting all the legal requirements for a design which allows for recycling and re-use. There is a network of return points and disassembly plants which can recycle your vehicle in an environmentally-responsible manner. The options for recycling vehicles and parts are constantly being developed and improved. This means that your MercedesBenz will also continue to meet even the increased recycling quotas in the future in good time. You can obtain further information from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage or your national hotline number. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 17 Version: 2.9.4 Introduction Operating safety Operating safety Safety notes G Risk of accident and injury All work on the vehicle and, in particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The specialist workshop must have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. G Risk of accident and injury Some safety systems only function when the engine is running. Therefore, do not switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise, the safety systems in your vehicle may no longer function correctly and thereby not provide you or others with the intended degree of protection. This also increases the danger of your losing control of your vehicle and thereby the risk of causing an accident. G Risk of accident and injury Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations made to the vehicle, e.g. rerouting of cables under coverings, could cause the safety systems of your vehicle to stop working properly. The safety systems would thus no longer protect you and other persons as intended. In addition, there is the danger that you may lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an accident. All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g. installations or modifications, should therefore be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident A heavy impact to the underbody, tyres or wheels, for example when bottoming out on rough terrain or driving over an obstacle at high speed, could damage your vehicle. As a result, you could cause an accident. This also applies to vehicles which are equipped with underbody protection. For this reason, drive slowly over obstacles, avoid bottoming out the vehicle in rough terrain and, if necessary, have your vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident If work on electronic equipment and its software is carried out incorrectly, this equipment could stop functioning. The electronic systems are networked via interfaces. Tampering with these electronic systems could cause malfunctions in systems which have not been modified. Such malfunctions can seriously jeopardise the vehicle’s operating safety and your own safety as well. Therefore have all work on and modifications to electronic components carried out by a qualified workshop. Vehicle registration Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles to improve their quality or safety. If you did not purchase your vehicle from an authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle has never been inspected at a MercedesBenz Service Centre, it is possible that your vehicle is not registered in your name with Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if it has your registration data. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z 17 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, Introduction Operating safety Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. Correct use Observe the following information when using your vehicle: RThe safety notes in this manual RThe "Technical data" section in this manual RNational road traffic regulations RNational road traffic licensing regulations G Risk of injury Various warning stickers are affixed to your vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your attention, and the attention of others, to various dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warning stickers unless the sticker clearly states that you may do so. If you remove the warning stickers, you or others could be injured by failing to recognise certain dangers. 18 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 18 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 19 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Exterior view ....................................... Cockpit ................................................. Instrument cluster .............................. Multi-function steering wheel ............ Centre console .................................... Overhead control panel ...................... Door control panel .............................. Stowage compartments ..................... 20 22 26 30 31 34 35 36 19 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Exterior view Exterior view 20 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 20 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 21 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Exterior view Function 1 Page Luggage compartment/ boot Opening and closing Function 8 70 Exterior mirrors 91 Parking aid* 92 Windscreen wipers, operation 105 254 Cleaning the wiper blades 246 Vehicle battery 329 Replacing the wiper blades 315 2 Rear lights 311 Opening the bonnet 222 3 Rear window heating 175 Engine oil 223 4 Fuel filler flap 218 Coolant 225 Fuel requirements 219 b Front lights 311 c Fitting the front towing eye 337 d Tyres and wheels 227 Checking the tyre pressure 229 Flat tyre, fitting the spare wheel 317 Fitting the rear towing eye 337 Spare wheel 254 Vehicle tool kit 5 Opening and closing the doors 6 Demisting the windscreen 174 Cleaning the windows 246 Sliding/tilting sunroof* 180 Panorama sliding sunroof* 183 7 * optional 66 9 Page a e 21 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Cockpit Cockpit Cockpit, left-hand-drive vehicles 22 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 22 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 23 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Cockpit Function 1 Combination switch with: • Main-beam headlamps 101 • Turn signals 101 • Windscreen wipers 105 • Estate: rear window wiper 2 Page 106 Cruise control lever for: • Cruise control 143 • Distronic* 145 • Speedtronic 152 3 Instrument cluster 4 Multi-function steering wheel 5 Horn 6 Linguatronic lever* – see separate operating instructions * optional Function 7 Parktronic* warning display 160 8 Controls Thermatic or 4zone Thermotronic* Switches the rear window heating on/off Function Page g Adjusts the steering wheel manually 89 h 164 Adjusts the steering wheel electrically* 89 175 Switches the steering wheel heating* on/off 90 34 j Parking brake 113 Glove compartment 205 k Opens the bonnet 222 b Opens the glove compartment 205 l Releases the parking brake 113 c Opens the spectacles compartment/mobile phone compartment m Door control panel 35 n Light switch 99 206 o Adjusts the headlamp range 9 Overhead control panel a 26 30 Page d Controls COMAND APS* and the audio system*, see the respective operating instructions e Centre console 31 f Ignition lock 76 102 23 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Cockpit Cockpit, right-hand-drive vehicles 24 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 24 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 25 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Cockpit Function 1 Overhead control panel 2 Controls Thermatic or 4zone Thermotronic* Page 34 164 Switches the rear window heating on/off 175 3 Parktronic* warning display 160 4 Combination switch with: • Main-beam headlamps 101 • Turn signals 101 • Windscreen wipers • Estate: rear window wiper 5 105 106 Cruise control lever for: • Cruise control 143 • Distronic* 145 • Speedtronic 152 * optional Function Page 6 Instrument cluster 7 Multi-function steering wheel 8 Horn 9 Linguatronic lever* – see separate operating instructions a Adjusts the headlamp range b Light switch 99 c Door control panel 35 d Releases the parking brake 113 e Opens the bonnet 222 f Ignition lock 76 g Adjusts the steering wheel manually 89 Function h 30 Page Adjusts the steering wheel electrically* 89 Switches the steering wheel heating* on/off 90 j Parking brake 113 k Centre console 31 l Controls COMAND APS* and the audio system*, see the respective operating instructions m Opens the spectacles compartment/mobile phone compartment 206 n Opens the glove compartment 205 o Glove compartment 205 102 25 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Instrument cluster Instrument cluster Instrument cluster, kilometres 26 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 26 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 27 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Instrument cluster Function 1 1 2 Page Function Turn signal indicator lamp, left 101 2 ESP® warning lamp 285 3 Segments 4 Distance warning lamp*1 5 Turn signal indicator lamp, right 101 6 SRS warning lamp 289 7 ABS warning lamp 285 8 Seat belt warning lamp 290 9 Coolant temperature gauge 120 k Total distance recorder a Coolant warning lamp 287 l b Main-beam indicator lamp 101 Automatic transmission*: selector lever position display c Dipped-beam indicator lamp 286 99 Page d Rev counter 121 e Multi-function display 123 f Trip meter 121 g Depending on the setting in the on-board computer: 134 • Outside temperature2 • Digital speedometer h Standard display j Automatic transmission*: gearshift program display m 125 115 Function Page n Engine diagnostic warning lamp 288 o Tyre pressure warning lamp* 289 p Brake system warning lamp 286 q Clock 135 r Reserve fuel warning lamp 291 s Fuel gauge t Reset button 120 u Diesel engine: preglow indicator lamp 111 115 Speedometer On vehicles without Distronic*, the symbol lights up briefly but has no function. Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is always shown instead of the outside temperature. * optional 27 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Instrument cluster Instrument cluster, miles 28 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 28 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 29 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Instrument cluster Function 1 3 4 Page Function Turn signal indicator lamp, left 101 2 ESP® warning lamp 285 3 Segments 4 Distance warning lamp*3 5 Turn signal indicator lamp, right 101 6 SRS warning lamp 289 7 ABS warning lamp 285 8 Seat belt warning lamp 290 9 Coolant temperature gauge 120 k Total distance recorder a Coolant warning lamp 287 l b Main-beam indicator lamp 101 Automatic transmission*: selector lever position display c Dipped-beam indicator lamp 286 99 Page d Rev counter 121 e Multi-function display 123 f Trip meter 121 g Depending on the setting in the on-board computer: 134 • Outside temperature4 • Digital speedometer h Standard display j Automatic transmission*: gearshift program display m 125 115 Function Page n Engine diagnostic warning lamp 288 o Tyre pressure warning lamp* 289 p Brake system warning lamp 286 q Clock 135 r Reserve fuel warning lamp 291 s Fuel gauge t Reset button 120 u Diesel engine: preglow indicator lamp 111 115 Speedometer On vehicles without Distronic*, the symbol lights up briefly but has no function. Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the speed in km/h is always shown instead of the outside temperature. * optional 29 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 30 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Multi-function steering wheel Multi-function steering wheel Function 1 j Press briefly to k scroll back and forth in a menu. In the Audio/TV*/ DVD*menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene*. In the Telephone* menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or phone number. j Press and hold in the Audio/TV*/ DVD* menu: selects the next/ previous station or selects an audio track or a video scene* using rapid scrolling. In the Telephone* menu: starts rapid 30 Page Function Page k scrolling through the telephone book. 2 Multi-function display 3 æ • Selects submenus - in the Settings menu 123 • Adjusts the values • Adjusts the volume 4 s Accepts or rejects/ t ends a call* 5 è Selecting menus: ÿ scrolls back and forth * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 31 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Centre console Centre console Lower section Function 1 Opens/closes the stowage compartment 206 Opens/closes the ashtray* 209 2 KEYLESS GO* button 3 Manual transmission: gear lever 115 Automatic transmission*: selector lever 115 Vehicles with automatic transmission*: switches the auxiliary heating*/ventilation* on/off 177 5 Deactivates Parktronic* 160 6 Sets AIRMATIC DC* 157 Vehicles with manual transmission: switches the auxiliary heating*/ventilation* on/off 177 4 * optional Page 77 Function Page 7 Sets the vehicle level* 156 8 Distronic*: sets the specified distance 148 9 Distronic*: switches the distance warning function on/off 149 Automatic transmission*: selects the gearshift program 117 a 31 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Centre console Upper section 32 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 32 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 33 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Centre console Function 5 Page 1 Switches the seat heating* on the left-hand side on/off 2 Saloon: rolls the rear window blind* up/down 208 3 Saloon: folds back the rear seat head restraints 82 4 Switches the hazard warning lamps on/off 102 5 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp5 49 6 Unlocks the vehicle 70 7 Deactivates/activates ESP® 60 8 Switches the seat heating* on the right-hand side on/ off 85 85 Function 9 Page Switches the seat ventilation* on the right-hand side on/off 85 a ATA indicator lamp* 62 b Locks the vehicle 70 c Opening button for CD changer* – see separate operating instructions d Switches the seat ventilation* on the left-hand side on/off 85 The warning lamp lights up briefly when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock, even on vehicles which do not have automatic child seat recognition* on the front-passenger seat. In that case it has no function and does not indicate that the front-passenger seat is equipped with automatic child seat recognition*. * optional 33 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 34 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Overhead control panel Overhead control panel Function Page 1 ò Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 2 ¡ Switches the automatic interior lighting on/ off 104 3 ð Switches the front interior lighting on/off 104 4 X Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 104 5 Opens/closes the sliding/ tilting sunroof* 180 104 Function Page 9 Transmitter buttons for garage door opener* a Primes/deactivates towaway protection* b Ambient light* 104 c Interior light 104 d X Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 104 214 63 or 34 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof* 183 6 Primes/deactivates the interior motion sensor* 63 7 Rear-view mirror 91 8 Reading lamp 104 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 35 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Door control panel Door control panel * optional Function Page 1 Opens the door 69 2 Adjusts the seat electrically* 78 3 Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel* 93 4 Adjusts the exterior mirrors 91 5 Opens/closes the side windows 107 6 Saloon: unlocks the boot lid 70 Saloon with remote boot lid closing feature*: automatically opens or closes the boot lid 73 Estate with remote boot lid closing feature*: automatically opens the tailgate 73 35 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, At a glance Stowage compartments Stowage compartments 36 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 36 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 37 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Stowage compartments Function 1 Glove compartment 2 Front-passenger seat stowage compartment with firstaid kit Page 205 253 3 Door stowage pocket 4 Ashtray* 5 Ruffled pocket 6 Door stowage pocket 7 Luggage net 8 Stowage well under the boot floor 192 9 Hooks at the top of the boot 195 a Door stowage pocket b Ruffled pocket c Ashtray* d Door stowage pocket * optional Function e Driver's seat stowage compartment with fire extinguisher* 253 f Sun visor card clip 207 g Stowage compartment in the centre console 206 Socket 210 Ashtray* 209 Cigarette lighter* 209 209 h 209 Page Function l Spectacles compartment/ mobile phone compartment 206 j Luggage net in the frontpassenger footwell 190 k Stowage compartment in front of the armrest 206 Cup holder* in the centre console 186 Page Stowage compartment/ telephone compartment under the armrest 206 Stowage compartment in the centre console at the rear 207 Socket 210 n Cup holder in the rear seat armrest 186 o Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest 207 m 37 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 38 Version: 2.9.4 At a glance Stowage compartments Function 38 Page 1 EASY-PACK stowage box* 204 2 Stowage well underneath the front section of the luggage compartment floor 192 3 Bag hooks 4 Luggage net 5 Stowage well underneath the rear section of the luggage compartment floor 6 Loading tray 7 Folding box 8 Luggage net 192 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 39 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety .................................. 40 Driving safety systems ....................... 58 Anti-theft systems .............................. 62 39 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 40 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety Occupant safety Notes on occupant safety Seat belts, together with belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags, are coordinated restraint systems. They reduce the risk of injury in defined accident situations and thereby increase occupant safety. However, seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. To ensure that the restraint systems can deliver their full potential protection, you should ensure that: Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 77) Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly (Y page 95) Rthe airbags can inflate properly if they are deployed (Y page 43) Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly (Y page 89) Rthe fied restraint systems have not been modi- i An airbag increases the protection of vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. 40 However, airbags are only an additional restraint system which complements, but does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times, even if the vehicle is equipped with airbags. This is because - on the one hand - airbags are not deployed in all types of accident, as in some situations airbag deployment would not increase the protection afforded to vehicle occupants, provided they are wearing their seat belt correctly. On the other hand, airbag deployment only provides increased protection if the seat belt is worn correctly because: Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the airbag Rfor example, in a head-on collision, the seat belt can more adequately prevent the occupant from being propelled towards the force of the impact, and is thus better suited to prevent injury Therefore, in accident situations where an airbag is deployed, it only provides protection in addition to the seat belt if the seat belt is being worn correctly. G Risk of accident and injury Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is not carried out correctly, the operating safety of your vehicle may be affected. There is a risk of an accident and injury. G Risk of injury The restraint system may not work as intended if the following components have been modified or work on these components has not been performed correctly: Rrestraint system, consisting of the seat belts and anchorages, belt tensioners, belt force limiters, airbags Rwiring Rnetworked electronic systems Airbags or belt tensioners could then fail, e.g. in the event of an accident in which the Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 41 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety deceleration force would normally be high enough to trigger the systems, or they could be triggered unintentionally. Never carry out any modifications on the restraint systems. Never tamper with electronic components and their software. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) The SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. The SRS consists of: Rthe 1 warning lamp Rbelt tensioners Rbelt force limiters Rairbags The 1 warning lamp The SRS functions are checked regularly when you turn on the ignition and when the engine is running. Malfunctions can therefore be detected in good time. The 1 warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. G Risk of injury If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be activated unintentionally or not be triggered in the event of an accident with heavy braking. A malfunction has occurred if the 1 warning lamp: Rdoes not light up when you switch on the ignition Rdoes not go out after the engine has been running for a few seconds Rlights up again once the engine is running In this case, have SRS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force limiters and airbags In the event of a collision, the sensor in the airbag control unit evaluates important physical data such as duration, direction and force of the vehicle deceleration or acceleration. Based on the evaluation of this data, and depending on the vehicle's rate of longitudinal deceleration in a collision, the airbag control unit pre-emptively triggers the belt tensioners in the first stage. i The front belt tensioners can only be triggered if the belt tongue is correctly engaged in the seat belt buckle. The front airbags are only deployed if there is an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction. Your vehicle has adaptive, dual stage front airbags. When the first activation threshold has been reached, the front airbag is filled with enough propellant gas to minimise the risk of injury. The front airbag is only fully inflated if a second threshold is reached within a few milliseconds, due to the control unit having detected further deceleration. Criteria for triggering belt tensioners and airbags In the first stage of a collision, the airbag control unit evaluates the duration and direction of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in order to determine whether it is necessary to trigger the belt tensioner and/or airbag. The belt tensioner and airbag triggering thresholds are variable and are adapted to the rate of deceleration of the vehicle. This proc- 41 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 42 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety ess is pre-emptive in nature as the airbag must be deployed during – and not at the end of – the collision. i Airbags are not deployed in all types of accidents. They are controlled by complex sensor technology and evaluation logic. This process is pre-emptive in nature as airbag deployment must take place during the impact and must be adapted to provide calculated, additional protection for the vehicle occupants. Not all airbags are deployed in an accident. The different airbag systems work independently of each other. However, the deployment of each individual system will depend on the type of accident determined by the control system in the first stages of the collision (head-on collision, side impact and overturn) and the extent of the accident (in particular, the vehicle's rate of deceleration or acceleration). The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are basically determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe 42 collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- tensioner could be activated in an emergency. Rthe characteristics of the object with which If the seat belt is also equipped with a belt force limiter, the force exerted by the seat belt on the seat occupant is reduced. Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the body. cle the vehicle has collided, e.g. the other vehicle Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of it. The vehicle may be deformed significantly, e. g. on the bonnet or the wing, without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the necessary deceleration does not occur. Conversely, airbags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformations. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are affected and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. Belt tensioners, belt force limiters The front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear are equipped with belt tensioners. ! Do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat if the seat is not occupied. Otherwise the belt i Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back towards the backrest. The front belt force limiters are synchronised with the front airbags, which distribute the forces exerted by the belt force limiters on the occupant over a greater area. When the ignition is switched on, the belt tensioner is triggered: Ronly if the restraint systems are operational (the 1 warning lamp lights up after the ignition is switched on and goes out once the engine is running) (Y page 41) Rfor each three-point seat belt in the front of the vehicle when the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end collision if the vehicle decelerates or acceler- Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 43 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact Rin certain situations if the vehicle overturns, and the system determines that it can provide additional protection When the belt tensioners are triggered you will hear a bang, which will not cause any harm to your hearing, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 1 warning lamp lights up. G Risk of injury If the seat belt tensioners have been triggered, they provide no additional protection in the event of another accident. Therefore, have belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety regulations when disposing of belt tensioners. Any MercedesBenz Service Centre can provide details of these regulations. Airbags Airbag deployment slows down and restricts the movement of the vehicle occupant. When the the airbags are triggered you will hear a bang, which will not cause any harm to * optional your hearing, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 1 warning lamp lights up. The SRS/AIRBAG symbol indicates the location of the airbags. G Risk of injury Airbags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. Observe the following notes to reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury if an airbag is deployed: RAll vehicle occupants — in particular preg- nant women — must wear their seat belt correctly at all times and lean back against the backrest, which should be positioned as close to the vertical as possible. The head restraint must support the back of the head at about eye level. RAlways secure children less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age in suitable child restraint systems. RAll vehicle occupants must select a seat position that is as far away from the airbag as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The driver's chest should be as far away from the middle of the driver's front airbag cover as possible. RMove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible, especially if a child is secured in a child restraint system on the seat. RVehicle occupants – in particular, children – must not lean their head into the area of the window in which the sidebag/ windowbag is deployed. RRearward-facing child restraint systems must not be fitted to the front-passenger seat unless the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. On the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag is only deactivated if a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition is fitted to the frontpassenger seat*. The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp must be constantly lit. If either the rearward-facing child restraint system or the front-passenger seat* of your vehicle do not have automatic child seat recognition, children must be secured in a child restraint system on a suitable seat in the rear. If you 43 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 44 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety secure a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. RMake sure there are no heavy or sharpedged objects in pockets of clothing. RDo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of the driver's front airbag, particularly when the vehicle is in motion. RDo not put your feet on the dashboard. ROnly hold the steering wheel by the rim. This allows the airbag to inflate fully. You could be injured if the airbag is deployed and you are holding the inside of the steering wheel. RDo not lean on the doors from inside the vehicle. RMake sure that there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and the area of deployment of the airbag. RDo not place any objects between the seat backrest and the door. 44 RDo not hang any hard objects, for example coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat hooks. RDo not attach accessories, e.g. cup hold- ers, to the doors. It is not possible to rule out a risk of injuries caused by an airbag due to the high speed at which the airbag is required to deploy. G Risk of injury The airbag's functionality can only be guaranteed if the following parts are not covered and no badges or stickers are attached to them: RPadded steering wheel boss RFront-passenger ROuter RRear front airbag cover side of front seats door trims G Risk of injury When an airbag deploys, a small amount of powder is released. The powder may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the interior. The powder does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. G Risk of injury The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. Do not touch them, otherwise you may burn yourself. Have the airbags checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are not protected by the airbags in the event of another accident. Front airbags The front airbags are designed to increase protection for the driver's and frontpassenger head and chest. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 45 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety The driver's front airbag and front-passenger front airbag are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction Rif the system determines that airbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Rif the seat belt is fastened Rindependently cle of other airbags in the vehi- Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction Driver's front airbag 1 deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front airbag 2 deploys in front of and above the glove compartment. On vehicles with automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat*, the frontpassenger front airbag 2 is only deployed if the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp in the centre console is not lit (Y page 49). This means that there is not a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition* fitted to the frontpassenger seat or that a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition* has been fitted to the front-passenger seat incorrectly. Appropriate seat covers can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The purpose of sidebag deployment is to enhance the level of protection for the thorax (but not the head, neck or arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. Sidebags G Risk of injury 1 Driver's front airbag 2 Front-passenger front airbag * optional If you wish to use seat covers, MercedesBenz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use seat covers that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The seat covers must be equipped with a special tear seam for sidebags. Otherwise, the sidebag cannot deploy correctly and would therefore fail to provide the intended protection in the event of an accident. Saloon shown as an example 1 Front sidebag 2 Rear sidebag* The sidebag inflates next to the backrest side cushions. Z 45 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 46 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety Sidebags 1 and 2 are deployed: Ron PRE-SAFE® system the side on which an impact occurs PRE-SAFE® system takes pre-emptive measures to protect you in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes in the event of: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact Rindependently of seat belt use Rindependently of the front airbags Rindependently of the belt tensioners Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a lateral direction and determines that sidebag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Windowbags The purpose of the windowbags is to enhance the level of protection for the head (but not chest or arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. The windowbags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and run from the front door (A-pillar) to the rear door (C-pillar). 46 Remergency braking situations, e.g. if BAS Brake Assist intervenes Rcritical Saloon shown as an example 1 Windowbag Windowbags 1 are deployed: Rat the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a lateral direction Ron the side on which an impact occurs Rindependently of the front airbags Rregardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Rif the vehicle overturns and the system determines that windowbag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt situations involving driving dynamics, e.g. if the vehicle oversteers or understeers significantly due to physical limits being exceeded If you are driving faster than approximately 30 km/h, PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures in the aforementioned situations: RIt tensions the front seat belts. RVehicles with memory functions*: it adjusts the front-passenger seat if this is in an unfavourable position. RIf the vehicle skids, it closes the sliding/ tilting sunroof* and side windows so that only a small gap remains. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® releases the belt pretensioning. You can then reverse all settings made by PRE-SAFE® again. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 47 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety If the seat belts are not released: X Move the backrest or the seat back slightly until the belt tension is reduced. The locking mechanism releases. G Risk of injury Make sure when adjusting the seat that nobody can become trapped. restraints cannot provide the intended level of protection. Do not use head restraint covers. If the NECK-PRO head restraints are triggered in an accident, you must reset the head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats (Y page 309). Head restraints that have been triggered are tilted forwards. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when adjusting the seats. You could otherwise damage the seats and the objects. NECK-PRO head restraint NECK-PRO head restraints are designed to increase protection to the driver's and frontpassenger's head and neck. To this end, the head restraints on the driver's and frontpassenger seats are moved forwards and upwards in the event of a rear-end collision in the direction of travel. This provides better head support. G Risk of injury Head restraint covers prevent the NECKPRO head restraints from triggering correctly. Consequently, the NECK-PRO head Children in the vehicle If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure the child using a child restraint system which is appropriate to the size and age of the child and recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Preferably, you should fit the restraint system to a suitable rear seat. Ensure that the child is strapped in throughout the trip. You can obtain information about the correct child restraint system from any MercedesBenz Service Centre. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products to clean child restraint systems. Information about this can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. Children could injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. They could also be seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The metallic parts of the child restraint system could heat up and the child could be burned by them. If children open a door, they could injure themselves and others. They could get out and injure themselves or be injured by a passing vehicle. Please also observe the information on HOLD. Relevant information can be found in the index. G Risk of injury An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load increases the risk of injury to the child in the event of: Ran accident Ra braking manoeuvre Ra sudden change of direction Z 47 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 48 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle unless they are secured. You will find further information under "Loading guidelines" in the index. Child restraint systems Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use the child restraint systems listed under (Y page 53). G Risk of injury To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: RChildren less than 1.50 m tall and under twelve years of age must always be secured in special child restraint systems on a suitable vehicle seat. This is necessary because the seat belts are not designed for children of this size. RDo not secure children under twelve years of age on the front-passenger seat. Exception: the child is secured in a vehicle with automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat* and is secured in a child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition. 48 RIf you secure a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat without automatic child seat recognition*, you must move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. RChildren must never travel sitting on the lap of another occupant. Due to the forces occurring in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident, it would not be possible to restrain the child. The child could be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously or even fatally injured. G Risk of injury If the child restraint system is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat, it cannot perform its protective function. The child cannot be restrained in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident. This may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. Child restraint systems should preferably be fitted to the rear seats. Children are generally better protected there. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with their original covers. Only replace damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. For safety reasons, you should only use child restraint systems which have been approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Child seat on the front-passenger seat Warning on the front-passenger sun visor * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 49 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Ralways move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position if you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Ron Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system G Risk of injury If the front-passenger front airbag is not disabled: Ra child secured in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat could be seriously and even fatally injured by the front-passenger airbag deploying. This is especially likely if the child is in the immediate vicinity of the front-passenger front airbag when it is deployed. Ra child must never be secured on the front-passenger seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Only secure a vehicles without automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat* Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec- ognition on the front-passenger seat* if there is no child restraint system with automatic child seat recognition fitted to the front-passenger seat. Information about recommended child restraint systems is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat* If your vehicle does not have automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, this is indicated by a special sticker. The sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard on the front-passenger side. It is visible when you open the front-passenger door. The warning lamp6 is located on the centre console. Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec- ognition on the front-passenger seat* if the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is not lit. To draw attention to this danger, there is an appropriate warning sticker on the dashboard as well as on both sides of the sun visor on the front-passenger side. 1 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp 6 Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: the warning lamp lights up briefly when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. However, it has no function and does not indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat. * optional 49 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 50 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety The front-passenger seat sensor system for child restraint systems detects whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat recognition has been fitted. In such cases, 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 1 lights up. The frontpassenger airbag is deactivated. G Risk of injury If the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp does not light up when the child restraint system is fitted, the frontpassenger front airbag has not been disabled. If the front-passenger front airbag is deployed, the child could be seriously or even fatally injured. Proceed as follows: Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. 50 or Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. Rhave the automatic child seat recognition checked at a qualified specialist workshop. To ensure that the automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat functions correctly, never place objects (such as a cushion) under the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system cannot perform its intended protective function in the event of an accident, and could lead to injuries. i The windowbag, the sidebag and the belt tensioner on the front-passenger side are still active even when the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. G Risk of injury Do not place items of electronic equipment on the front-passenger seat, e.g.: Rlaptops, Rmobile when switched on phones Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access cards Signals from electronic equipment can cause interference in the automatic child seat recognition sensor system. This can lead to a system malfunction. This may cause the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp to light up without there being a child seat with automatic child seat recognition fitted. This means that the front-passenger airbag is not deployed during an accident. It is also possible that the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp will not light up briefly if you turn the key in the ignition lock to position 2. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 51 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety Suitable positioning of the child restraint system Saloon Weight categories and ages Child restraint system Child restraint system Child restraint system on the front-passenger on the left-hand and on the centre rear seat seat right-hand rear seats without through-loading feature* Child restraint system on the centre rear seat with through-loading feature* Group 0: up to 10 kg; Up to approximately 9 months Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition* on the front-passenger seat: as recommended7 Universal or as recommended Universal or as recommended As recommended Universal8 or as recommended Universal or as recommended Universal or as recommended Universal9 or as recommended Group 0+: up to 13 kg; Up to approximately 18 months Group I: 9 to 18 kg; Between approximately 8 months and 4 years Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg; between approximately 3½ and 12 years Only use child restraint systems with automatic child seat recognition. Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. 9 Forward-facing child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. 7 Z 8 * optional 51 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 52 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety Estate Weight categories and ages Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat Child restraint system on the Child restraint system on the left-hand, right-hand and folding bench seat* centre rear seats Group 0: up to 10 kg; Up to approximately 9 months Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition* on the frontpassenger seat: as recommended10 Universal or as recommended Group 0+: up to 13 kg; Up to approximately 18 months Group I: 9 to 18 kg; Between approximately 8 months and 4 years Universal11 or as recommended Universal or as recommended Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg; between approximately 3½ and 12 years Not permissible As recommended12 As recommended12 with the following restrictions: permitted weight 15 to 25 kg, permitted age 3½ to 7½ years 10 Only use child restraint systems with automatic child seat recognition. the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. 12 Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system. 11 Move 52 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 53 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety "Universal" category child restraint systems can be recognised by their orange approval label. Example of an approval label on the child restraint system Recommended child restraint systems Weight categories and ages Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num- Automatic child seat ber recognition Group 0: up to 10 kg; Up to approximately 9 months Britax-Römer BABY SAFE PLUS E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes Group 0+: up to 13 kg; Up to approximately 18 months Britax-Römer BABY SAFE PLUS E1 03 301146 A 000 970 10 00 Yes Z 53 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 54 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety Weight categories and ages Manufacturer Type Approval number Daimler order num- Automatic child seat ber recognition Group I: 9 to 18 kg; Between approximately 8 months and 4 years Britax-Römer DUO PLUS E1 03 301133 A 000 970 11 00 Yes A 000 970 16 00 No13 Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg; between approximately 3½ and 12 years Britax-Römer A 000 970 12 00 Yes A 000 970 17 00 No13 ISOFIX* child seat securing system in the rear ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially-designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing rings for two child restraint systems are fitted on the left and right rear seats. G Risk of injury A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system does not provide sufficient protection for children weighing more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not secure children weighing more than 22 kg in a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX child seat securing system. If 13 For 54 KID E1 03 301148 the child weighs more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint system using a lap-shoulder belt. G Risk of injury If the child restraint system is not correctly fitted to a suitable vehicle seat, it cannot perform its protective function. The child cannot be restrained in the event of a sudden change of direction, heavy braking or an accident. This may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For this reason, when fitting a child restraint system, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use of the child restraint system. On the rear seats, only use child restraint systems with an ISOFIX child seat securing system which have been recommended for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. An incorrectly fitted child restraint system could come loose and seriously or even fatally injure the child or other vehicle occupants. When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that it is engaged in the securing rings on both sides. G Risk of injury Please note that child restraint systems cannot provide a protective function if they or their retaining systems are damaged or have been subjected to a load in an acci- child restraint systems without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to the rearmost position. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 55 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety dent. This can result in serious or even fatal injury to the secured child in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. For this reason, have child restraint systems and their anchorages which are damaged or which have been subjected to a load in an accident checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. ! When fitting the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat does not become trapped. It could otherwise be damaged. Integrated child seat* The child seats are integrated into the right and left-hand sides of the seats of the rear bench seat. They comply with the legal requirements of ECE Regulation 44.03. Mercedes-Benz recommends the integrated child seat for children from approximately two to twelve years or with a body weight of 12.5 kg to 36 kg. For children between approximately two and four years of age or weighing between approximately 12.5 kg and 18 kg, you must also use a padded table which has been specially approved for the integrated child seat. by the centre of the head restraint at about eye level. RReplace an integrated child seat or padded table that has been damaged or subjected to a heavy load as the result of an accident RBe aware that children under two years of age require a different child restraint system. Information about other child restraint systems is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RThe rear seat backrest in the vehicle must be securely locked in position. G Risk of injury To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: RYou must follow the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child seat when fitting the padded table and fastening the seat belt. RDo 1 Securing rings * optional not modify the integrated child seat or padded table. RWhen the child seat is occupied, adjust the head restraint to a position at which the back of the child's head is supported 1 Release handle 2 Hook Z 55 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 56 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety Folding out the child seat X Pull release handle 1 forwards. X Push the child seat upwards and back until it engages. Fastening a child's seat belt G Risk of injury To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal injury to the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident: RThe shoulder belt section of the seat belt must be routed across the middle of the child's shoulder – never across the child's neck – and be pulled tight against the child's chest. The lap section of the seat belt must be routed across the child's pelvis – not across the abdomen – and be pulled tight against the child's body; retighten the belt strap if necessary. secure more than one child at a time in the child restraint system. Also observe the assembly instructions for the padded table and the additional warnings and information about risk of injury. X Pull the belt smoothly from the belt reel. X Guide the lower lap section of the belt through hook 2. X Engage the belt tongue in the buckle. X If the integrated child seat is being used without the padded table, make sure that the belt: Ris routed as low as possible across the pel- vic area, in front of the hips Ris tightened across the lap by pulling upwards on the child's shoulder belt Ris tight and is routed across the middle of the child's shoulder Ris not twisted and does not pass across the child's neck or under the child's arm RNever X RThe Folding in the child seat X Pull release handle 1 forwards. RThe X belt must be routed through the hook. belt strap must not be trapped or twisted, nor rub against any sharp edges. 56 Adjust the head restraint (Y page 81) Push the child seat back into the seat until it engages. Child-proof locks If children are travelling in the vehicle, you can activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors. Child-proof locks for the rear doors The child-proof locks on the rear doors enable you to secure each door individually. A locked door cannot be opened from the inside. The door can be opened from the outside if the vehicle is unlocked. G Risk of accident and injury If children are travelling in the vehicle, activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override switch for the rear windows. The children could otherwise open the doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 57 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Occupant safety otherwise open the tailgate, doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. The child-proof lock for the tailgate prevents the tailgate from being opened from the inside. Override feature for the rear windows G Risk of accident and injury If children are travelling in the vehicle, activate the child-proof locks for the rear doors and the override switch for the rear windows. The children could otherwise open the doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion and injure themselves or others. Saloon shown as an example 1 To activate 2 To deactivate X To activate: press locking lever upwards 1. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press locking lever downwards 2. Child-proof lock for the tailgate (Estate) G Risk of accident and injury Activate the child-proof locks for the tailgate and the rear doors and the override switch for the rear windows if children are travelling in the vehicle. The children could 1 To activate 2 To deactivate X To activate: push the locking lever to the left 1. X Check that the child-proof lock is working properly. X To release: press safety lever to the right 2. 1 Button 2 Indicator lamp X To activate: press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The rear side windows can only be operated using the switches on the driver's door. Z 57 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 58 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Driving safety systems X To deactivate: press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. You can operate the rear side windows using the switches in the rear compartment. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) RBAS (Brake Assist System) RAdaptive RESP® REBV brake lamps (Electronic Stability Program) (electronic brake-power distribution) RADAPTIVE BRAKE i In wintry road conditions, always use winter tyres (M+S tyres) and, where necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. G Risk of accident The risk of an accident is significantly increased by driving too fast. This is particularly the case when cornering as well as on wet or slippery roads or when driving too close to the vehicle in front. The driving safety systems described in this section cannot reduce this risk nor override the laws of physics. 58 For this reason, always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. Maintain sufficient distance from other road users and objects on the road. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h upwards, regardless of road surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. G Risk of accident Do not depress the brake pedal several times in quick succession (pumping). Depress the brake firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake pedal reduces the braking effect. Braking If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 59 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Driving safety systems X X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. G Risk of accident If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction, then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. BAS (Brake Assist) BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. G Risk of accident If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system remains available with full brake boosting effect. However, braking force is not automatically increased in emergency braking situations and the stopping distance may increase. Adaptive brake lamps i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in certain countries. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, traffic travelling behind you is warned in an even more noticeable manner. If you brake sharply from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warning lamps are activated automatically. If the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps light up continuously. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if you drive faster than 10 km/h again. You can also switch off the hazard warning lamps using the hazard warning switch button (Y page 102). Z 59 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 60 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Driving safety systems ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tyres and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. The engine output is also modified, if necessary, to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehicle during braking. When ESP® intervenes, the v warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. G Risk of accident If the v warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as follows: RDo not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. RAdapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. The vehicle could otherwise go into a skid. 60 ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the laws of physics. ! If the vehicle is to be towed with the front or rear axle raised, the ignition must be switched off (key in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock). Application of the brakes by ESP® could otherwise destroy the brake system on the front or rear axle. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC* may not be towed with the front or rear axle raised. i Only use wheels with the recommended tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Deactivating/activating ESP® ESP® is activated automatically when the engine is running. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen Rin G Risk of accident Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. Rengine torque is not limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect for better traction. Rtraction control is still activated. RESP® still provides support when you brake. i If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the v warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle. using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 61 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Driving safety systems X To activate: press button 1. The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. EBV (electronic brake-power distribution) 1 Deactivating/activating ESP® X To deactivate: press button 1. The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. G Risk of accident If the v warning lamp in the instrument cluster is continuously lit when the engine is running, ESP® is deactivated or not available due to a malfunction. There is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situations. You should always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. EBV monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability under braking. ADAPTIVE BRAKE Due to its higher level of braking safety, ADAPTIVE BRAKE offers exceptional braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also features the convenience function HOLD (Y page 155). For further information, see Driving tips (Y page 236). G Risk of accident If EBV is malfunctioning, the brake system is still available with full brake boosting effect. However, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Z 61 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 62 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Anti-theft systems Anti-theft systems Immobiliser The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. Activating the immobiliser X X With the key: remove the key from the ignition lock. With KEYLESS GO*: press the KEYLESS GO button on the selector lever. The engine switches off. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is primed and you open: Ra door Ra door using the emergency key element Rthe boot lid/tailgate Rthe bonnet The alarm is not switched off even if you close an open door again. With the key: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X With KEYLESS GO*: press the KEYLESS GO button on the selector lever twice without depressing the brake. i The immobiliser is always deactivated when you start the engine. 62 X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, you can also unlock the vehicle by opening the door/boot lid/tailgate. Switching off the alarm X Deactivating the immobiliser X button on the door handle/boot lid/tailgate can also be used. Indicator lamp 1 flashes. The alarm system is primed after approximately 15 seconds. ATA* (anti-theft alarm system) With the key: insert the key into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Œ or ‹ button on the key. The alarm is switched off. X With KEYLESS GO*: pull the door handle. The key must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. 1 Indicator lamp X To prime: lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking or X Press the KEYLESS GO button on the selector lever. The key must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 63 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Anti-theft systems Tow-away protection* Interior motion sensor* An audible and visual alarm is triggered if your vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while tow-away protection is primed. This happens if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for example. If the interior motion sensor is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior while the vehicle is locked. This occurs, for example, if someone breaks the side windows of your vehicle or reaches into the vehicle's interior. Priming tow-away protection X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking button on the door handle/boot lid/tailgate can also be used. Tow-away protection is primed after approximately 30 seconds. To deactivate tow-away protection When you unlock your vehicle using the key or KEYLESS GO*, tow-away protection is automatically deactivated. Deactivate tow-away protection manually to prevent a false alarm if your vehicle: Ris being transported Ris being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car transporter 1 To deactivate tow-away protection 2 Indicator lamp X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up briefly. X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking button on the door handle/boot lid/tailgate can also be used. Tow-away protection remains deactivated until the vehicle is unlocked and locked again. Priming the interior motion sensor X Make sure that: Rthe side windows are closed Rthe sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* is closed Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang- ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grasp handles on the roof trim. This will prevent false alarms. X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking buttons on the door handle/boot lid/tailgate can also be used. The interior motion sensor is primed after approximately 30 seconds. Ris being parked on a movable surface, e.g. split-level garages * optional Z 63 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 64 Version: 2.9.4 Safety Anti-theft systems To deactivate the interior motion sensor To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the interior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle and Rpeople Rthe or animals remain in the vehicle the door handle/boot lid/tailgate can also be used. The interior motion sensor remains deactivated until the vehicle is unlocked and locked again. windows remain open Rthe sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* remains open. 1 To deactivate the interior motion sensor 2 Indicator lamp X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 flashes briefly. X Lock the vehicle using the key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking button on 64 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 65 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing ........................... Key positions ....................................... Seats .................................................... Steering wheel .................................... Mirrors ................................................. 66 76 77 89 91 Memory functions* ............................. 93 Seat belts ............................................. 95 Lights ................................................... 99 Windscreen wipers ........................... 105 Side windows .................................... 107 Driving and parking .......................... Transmission ..................................... Instrument cluster ............................ On-board computer .......................... Driving systems ................................ Air conditioning ................................. Sliding sunroof .................................. Loading and stowing ........................ Features ............................................. 110 114 120 121 142 162 180 186 207 65 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 66 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Factory settings Key X The vehicle's equipment includes two keys with remote control. Each key contains an emergency key element. The key is configured at the factory to centrally lock and unlock the following: Rthe doors Rthe boot lid/tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap G Risk of accident If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen a door from the inside at any time, even if it has been locked Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been left in the vehicle Rrelease the parking brake They could endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for a short time. 66 1 j To lock the vehicle 2 i To unlock the boot lid/tailgate* i If you do not open either a door or the boot lid/tailgate after you have unlocked the vehicle, it will automatically relock after approximately 40 seconds. 3 k To unlock the vehicle 4 Battery check lamp i You can also open and close the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof* with the key. You can open them using the summer opening feature (Y page 109). You can close them using the convenience closing feature (Y page 109). To unlock centrally: press the k button. The turn signals flash once. The locking knobs in the doors pop up. The anti-theft alarm system* is deactivated. When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer. X To lock centrally: press the j button. The turn signals flash three times if the doors and boot lid/tailgate are closed. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. The anti-theft alarm system* and the immobiliser are primed. Individual settings You can change the setting of the locking system in such a way that pressing the k button only unlocks the driver's door and the fuel filler flap. This could be useful if you frequently travel on your own. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 67 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing X To change the setting: press the k and j buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. The key now functions as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: press the k button once. X To unlock centrally: press the k button twice. X To lock centrally: press the j button. Restoring the factory settings X Press the k and j buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. KEYLESS GO key* The optional equipment supplied with your vehicle includes two KEYLESS GO keys. KEYLESS GO allows you to lock/unlock and start the vehicle simply by carrying the KEYLESS GO key with you. When you touch the surface of the sensors on the vehicle's door handles, KEYLESS GO establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the key. When you touch the inner surface of the door handle or press the button on the tailgate handle (Estate), your vehicle unlocks centrally if the factory settings have not been changed: Rthe doors Rthe boot lid/tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap When starting the engine and whilst driving, KEYLESS GO also checks whether a valid KEYLESS GO key is in the vehicle by periodically establishing radio contact. G Risk of accident If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could open a door from the inside, even if it has been locked. Or they could start the vehicle if a valid KEYLESS GO key * optional is in the vehicle and they press the KEYLESS GO button on the gear selector lever. They could endanger themselves and others. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and take the KEYLESS GO key with you, even if you are only leaving the vehicle for a short time. 1 j To lock the vehicle 2 i To unlock the boot lid/tailgate* 3 k To unlock the vehicle 4 Battery check lamp i You can also use the KEYLESS GO key to open and close the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof*. You can open them using the summer opening feature 67 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 68 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing (Y page 109). You can close them using the convenience closing feature (Y page 109). i If the vehicle has been parked for a long time, you must pull the door handle to activate the KEYLESS GO functions. Important notes RIf the KEYLESS GO key is removed from the vehicle (e.g. in luggage or an article of clothing), it will no longer be possible to lock or start the vehicle. RIf the KEYLESS GO key is removed from the vehicle while the engine is running, e.g. if the front passenger leaves the vehicle with the KEYLESS GO key, the following message will appear in the multi-function display as you pull away: Key not detected. RIf the KEYLESS GO key is in the vehicle, the vehicle can be started at any time. If you have left the KEYLESS GO key in the vehicle, the following message will appear in the multi-function display when you lock the vehicle: Key still in vehicle. 68 Factory settings X To unlock centrally: pull the door handle. The turn signals flash once. The locking knobs in the doors pop up. The anti-theft alarm system* is deactivated. When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer. i If you do not open either a door or the boot lid/tailgate after you have unlocked the vehicle, it will automatically relock after approximately 40 seconds. i There is a danger of the vehicle being unlocked unintentionally. This could occur if the KEYLESS GO key is within one metre of the vehicle and the door handle is splashed with water. This could also occur when cleaning the door handle. 1 Locking button on the door handle X To lock centrally: press locking button 1 on the door handle without touching the inside of the handle. The turn signals flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. The antitheft alarm system* and the immobiliser are primed. Individual settings You can change the setting of the locking system. If you now touch the inside surface of the door handle on the driver's door, you will only unlock the driver's door and the fuel filler flap. This could be useful if you frequently travel on your own. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 69 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing X To change the setting: press the k and j buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. The KEYLESS GO key will now function as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: pull the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: pull the door handle on the front-passenger door or on the rear doors. X To lock centrally (Saloon): press locking button 1 on the door handle, without touching the inside of the handle. X To lock centrally (Estate): press the locking button on the door handle or the tailgate. Restoring the factory settings X Press the k and j buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice. Locking centrally from the luggage compartment* (Estate) i If the vehicle is locked centrally while the tailgate is open, the tailgate will be locked automatically when it is closed. i If you leave the KEYLESS GO key in the vehicle, the tailgate will not lock. Locking from the boot/luggage compartment (vehicles with remote boot lid closing*) On vehicles with KEYLESS GO and remote boot lid closing*, you can close the boot lid/ tailgate automatically and thereby centrally lock your vehicle (Y page 74). Opening the doors from the inside You can open a door from the inside at any time, even if it has been locked. 1 Locking button on the tailgate X Press locking button 1 above the licence plate recess on the tailgate. The vehicle locks centrally. 1 Locking knob 2 Door handle Z * optional 69 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 70 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing X Pull door handle 2. If the door is locked, locking knob 1 pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. Automatic locking feature The vehicle will lock automatically once you have pulled away. You can switch off the automatic locking function via the on-board computer (Y page 137). Locking/unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This feature may be useful if, for example, you wish to unlock the passenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away. G Risk of accident Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open a door from the inside – even if it is locked – and thereby endanger themselves and others. i The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels begin to turn. There is therefore a risk of being locked out when the vehicle is being pushed or tested on a dynamometer. Boot/luggage compartment (vehicles without remote boot lid closing feature*) G Risk of poisoning Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior if the engine is running and the boot lid is open. This could poison you. Therefore, you should make sure that the boot lid/ tailgate is always closed when the engine is running. G Risk of accident Estate Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the tailgate from the inside and thereby endanger themselves and others. ! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. 1 Unlocking button 2 Locking button 70 X To unlock: press button 1. X To lock: press button 2. Opening from the outside You can only open the boot lid/tailgate after unlocking it first. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 71 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing X To unlock centrally: press the k button on the key. X Pull handle 1. X Raise the boot lid/tailgate. Opening from the outside using the key (Saloon) You can unlock and open the boot lid simultaneously with the key when the vehicle is stationary. X Press and hold the i button on the key until the boot lid opens. Saloon 1 Handle Saloon 1 Recess Closing from the outside G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the tailgate. i Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. Estate 1 Recess Estate 1 Handle Z 71 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 72 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing X X Pull the boot lid/tailgate down using recess 1. Lock the vehicle if necessary using the j button on the key or with KEYLESS GO*. Opening the tailgate from inside the vehicle (Estate with a folding bench seat*) ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, ensure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. Opening from the inside (Saloon) You can simultaneously unlock and open the boot from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. 1 Remote opening button X Pull remote operating button 1 until the boot lid opens. The indicator lamp in the button lights up and stays lit until the boot is closed again. 14 Not 72 i You can only open the tailgate from the inside if the child-proof locks have not been activated (Y page 56). 1 Handle 2 Locking catch X Pull the upper section of handle 1. X Swing the tailgate upwards. i The tailgate cannot be opened from the outside if you slide locking catch 2 in the handle to the right. Locking the boot separately (Saloon) You can lock the boot separately14. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the boot remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the boot lid. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 306). $ Basic position % To lock separately available in all countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 73 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing X Insert the emergency key element fully into the boot lock. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise to position %. X Remove the emergency key element. Boot/luggage compartment (vehicles with remote boot lid closing feature*) The remote boot lid closing feature* opens and closes the boot lid/tailgate automatically. You can stop the automatic opening and closing procedure at any time: RSaloon: by pulling or pressing the remote operating button at the driver's seat Estate: by pulling the remote operating button at the driver's seat again Rby pressing the i button on the key Rby pulling the handle on the boot lid/tailgate Rby pressing the closing button in the boot lid/tailgate On Estate vehicles, you will hear a warning tone as the tailgate is opening or closing. * optional G Risk of poisoning Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior if the engine is running and the boot lid is open. This could poison you. Therefore, you should make sure that the boot lid/ tailgate is always closed when the engine is running. G Risk of accident Estate Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the tailgate from the inside and thereby endanger themselves and others. Saloon 1 Handle ! The boot lid/tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the boot lid/tailgate. Opening from the outside You can only open the boot lid/tailgate after unlocking it first. X To unlock centrally: press the k button on the key. Estate 1 Handle X Pull handle 1. The boot lid/tailgate opens. Z 73 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 74 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing Opening from the outside using the key X Closing from the outside and locking centrally (using KEYLESS GO*) Press and hold the i button on the key until the boot lid/tailgate opens. You can close the boot lid/tailgate from the outside using the closing button in the boot lid/tailgate, or you can close and centrally lock the vehicle simultaneously with the KEYLESS GO button*. Closing from the outside (without KEYLESS GO*) You can close the boot lid/tailgate from the outside using the closing button in the boot lid/tailgate. G Risk of injury Monitor the boot lid/tailgate closing procedure to make sure that nobody can become trapped. To halt the closing procedure, press the closing switch in the boot lid/tailgate again, or press the i button on the key. G Risk of injury Saloon 1 Closing button Monitor the boot lid/tailgate closing procedure to make sure that nobody can become trapped. To halt the closing procedure, press the closing switch in the boot lid/tailgate again, or press the i button on the key. i Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. i Do not leave the key in the boot/luggage compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. Estate 1 Closing button X 74 Press closing button 1. The boot lid/tailgate closes automatically. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 75 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Opening and closing X To close: press closing button 1. X To close and lock centrally: press KEYLESS GO button* 2. i If you leave a KEYLESS GO key* in the boot/luggage compartment, the boot lid/ tailgate will not lock. Saloon 1 Closing button 2 KEYLESS GO button* Opening and closing from inside the vehicle Saloon: You can open and close the boot lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. Estate: You can open the tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. Saloon: Saloon 1 Remote operating button G Risk of injury Monitor the boot lid closing procedure to make sure that nobody can become trapped. Release the remote operating button to stop the closing procedure. Estate 1 Closing button Estate 1 Remote operating button 2 KEYLESS GO button* * optional Z 75 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 76 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Key positions X To open: pull remote operating button 1 until the boot lid/tailgate opens. X To close (Saloon): press remote operating button 1 until the boot lid is closed. Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate* (Estate) You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range. This could be useful, for example, when there is insufficient space above the tailgate. Activating X To open the tailgate: pull the handle. X To stop the opening procedure: pull the handle again. X Move the tailgate manually to the desired position. X Press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear a tone. The opening angle limiter is switched on. The tailgate will now stop in the saved position when opening. slightly and press the closing button again until you hear a tone. Key positions Key Deactivating X Press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear two brief tones. Opening the tailgate from inside the vehicle (Estate with a folding bench seat*) On Estate vehicles with a folding bench seat*, you can open the tailgate from the inside (Y page 72). Locking the boot separately (Saloon) You can lock the boot separately (Y page 72)15. Ignition lock } To remove the key $ Power supply for some consumers, such as the windscreen wipers % Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position & To start the engine i If you do not hear a tone, it was not pos- sible to save the position. Open the tailgate 15 Not 76 available in all countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 77 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats KEYLESS GO* If you press the KEYLESS GO button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal, its function corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. If you depress the brake pedal and press the KEYLESS GO button, the engine starts immediately. i In order for the engine to be started using the KEYLESS GO button, the KEYLESS GO key must be in the vehicle. i If there is a key in the ignition lock, it has priority over the KEYLESS GO function. If KEYLESS GO button 1 has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to "key removed" or position 0. X Position 1: press KEYLESS GO button 1 once. It is now possible to switch on the windscreen wipers, for example. i If you now press KEYLESS GO button 1 twice, the power supply is disconnected again. X Position 2 (ignition): press KEYLESS GO button 1 twice. i If you now press KEYLESS GO button 1 once, the power supply is disconnected again. Seats Points to remember You will find information about folding down the rear bench seat in the following sections: RThrough-loading feature in the rear bench seat (Saloon) (Y page 195) RLuggage compartment enlargement (Estate) (Y page 198) Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the seats can adjusted either manually/electrically or electrically*. G Risk of injury The seats can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could become trapped when adjusting a seat. G Risk of accident 1 KEYLESS GO button Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. Z * optional 77 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 78 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you adjust the seat. Observe the notes concerning the airbag system. Secure children as recommended; see "Children in the vehicle" section. Adjusting the seats manually and electrically there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the seats and the objects. Lift handle 4 and slide the seat forwards or backwards. X Release handle 4 again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage into position. X Slide the button forwards or back in direction of arrow 3. Seat height i The head restraints in the front seats are 78 X Backrest angle ! When you move the seats, make sure that fitted with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 47). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. For design reasons, some rear-compartment head restraints cannot be removed (Y page 83). Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for more information. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X 1 Seat cushion angle 2 Seat height 3 Backrest angle 4 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Slide the button up or down in direction of arrow 2. Seat cushion angle Adjust the angle so that your thighs are gently supported. X Slide the button up or down in direction of arrow 1. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 79 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats Head restraint height Head restraint position G Risk of injury Make sure that the central area of the head restraint supports the back of your head at about eye level. You could seriously injure your neck if your head is not correctly supported by the head restraint in the event of an accident. Never travel without a correctly adjusted and engaged head restraint. X Push or pull the head restraint in direction of the arrow. 1 To adjust the head restraint side bolsters 2 To move the head restraint back and forth X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull the right and/or lefthand side bolster 1 into the desired position. X To move the head restraint back and forth: push or pull the head restraint in direction of arrow 2. Luxury head restraint* G Risk of injury 1 Release catch X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch 1 in direction of arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. * optional When folding back the head restraint side bolsters, do not put your hands between the side bolster and the cushion holder. There is a danger of entrapment. Z 79 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 80 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats Adjusting the seat electrically* i Estate with memory function*/saloon with the through-loading feature* and memory function*: When the rear seat backrest is folded forward, the front-passenger seat is moved forwards slightly if necessary to prevent contact with the backrest. Seat height X 1 Head restraint height 2 Seat cushion angle 3 Seat height 4 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 5 Backrest angle i On vehicles with the memory function*, if PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavourable position. Slide the button up or down in the direction of arrow 3. Seat cushion angle Adjust the angle so that your thighs are gently supported. X Slide the button up or down in the direction of arrow 2. Head restraint height G Risk of injury Make sure that the central area of the head restraint supports the back of your head at about eye level. You could seriously injure your neck if your head is not correctly supported by the head restraint in the event of an accident. Never travel without a correctly adjusted and engaged head restraint. X Slide the button up or down in the direction of arrow 1. Head restraint position Backrest angle X Slide the button forwards or back in the direction of arrow 5. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment X Slide the button forwards or back in the direction of arrow 4. 80 X Push or pull the head restraint in the direction of the arrow. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 81 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats Luxury head restraint* G Risk of injury When folding back the head restraint side bolsters, do not put your hands between the side bolster and the cushion holder. There is a danger of entrapment. Lumbar support The lumbar support for the driver's seat can be adjusted to provide optimum support for your back. Rear seat head restraints G Risk of injury Only transport occupants on seats with head restraints fitted. If a seat is occupied, pull the head restraint up from the stowed position into the user position. This helps to reduce the risk of injury to occupants in the event of an accident. Folding up the head restraints 1 Adjustment lever X 1 To adjust the head restraint side bolsters 2 To move the head restraint back and forth X X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right-hand and/or left-hand side bolster 1 into the desired position. Move adjustment lever 1 in the direction of the arrow until the desired backrest contour is achieved. X Pull the head restraint in direction of arrow until it engages. To move the head restraint back and forth: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow 2. * optional Z 81 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 82 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats Folding back the head restraints from the front (Saloon) Folding back the head restraints from the rear (Estate) 1 Release catch 1 Button for folding back the rear seat head restraints X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button 1. 1 Release catch X Press release catch 1. Adjusting the head restraint height (Estate) G Risk of injury Make sure that the central area of the head restraint supports the back of your head at about eye level. You could seriously injure your neck if your head is not correctly supported by the head restraint in the event of an accident. Never travel without a correctly adjusted and engaged head restraint. 82 If the head restraint is fully inserted, it is necessary to press release catch 1. X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired height. X To lower: press release catch 1 and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. Adjusting the head restraint angle (Estate) Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head. You can engage the two outer head restraints in two positions. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 83 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats X To refit: place the head restraint in the guides and push it in. Estate 1 Release catch X Press release catch 1 and adjust the head restraint to the desired angle. Removing and fitting the head restraints G Risk of injury Occupants should only travel sitting on seats which have the head restraints installed. This reduces the risk of injury to the passengers in the rear in the event of an accident. Saloon* The release catches are on the back of the rear-seat backrest. * optional 1 Release catches for the rear-seat head restraints X To remove: fold the backrest forward (Y page 195). X Fold the head restraint forward. X Press release catches 1 and pull the head restraints out of the guides. i You must pull the outer head restraints X Fold the backrest back again until it engages. X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch 1 and pull the head restraint out of the guides. i When refitting the head restraints, make sure that you fit the correct head restraint to the centre seat. It is marked with the letter "M" on the outer sides of the support bars. Make sure that the head restraints engage fully. 1 Release catch firmly upwards to remove them. i When refitting the head restraints, make sure that you fit the correct head restraint to the centre seat. This has shorter guide rods. 83 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 84 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats X To refit: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it click into place. lumbar region and press button 2 to move it upwards to the upper back region. X Multi-contour seat* You can set the contour of the seat to provide optimum support for your back. Adjust the side cushions of the backrest using button 1 so that you have good lateral support. Dynamic multi-contour seat* Electrically adjustable front seat* 1 Backrest side cushions 2 Upper back support 3 Lumbar region support The dynamic multi-contour seat automatically adapts the sides of the backrest to your current driving style. You can set the backrest-side adaptation to Gentle or Vigorous in the on-board computer (Y page 131). 4 Thigh cushion Adjusting the contour of the backrest X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. Manually and electrically adjustable front seat 1 Backrest side cushions X Use switch 4 to move the thigh cushion into the desired position. 2 Upper back support 3 Lumbar region support X Press the æ or ç button to adjust the contour of the backrest to suit your back. 4 Thigh cushion X Press button 3 to move the point of greatest backrest curvature downwards to the 1 To switch dynamic multi-contour seat on or off 2 Backrest side cushions 3 Massage function 4 Upper back support 84 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 85 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats 5 Lumbar region support 6 Seat cushion length X To activate/deactivate: press button 1. The indicator lamp in the button lights up/ goes out. When switched on, the message Driving dynamics seat adjustment appears in the multi-function display for five seconds. Seat ventilation* The three blue indicator lamps in the button indicate the ventilation level you have selected. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. Seat heating* The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. Massage function (PULSE) The massage function helps you to prevent muscle tension on long journeys. X Press button 3. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. The air cushions in the lumbar region vibrate for approximately five minutes. 1 Seat ventilation X X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. 1 Front-seat heating To switch on: press button 1 repeatedly until the required ventilation level is set. i If you open the side windows and the sliding sunroof* using the key (Y page 109), the driver's seat ventilation automatically switches to the highest level. X * optional To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Z 85 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 86 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Folding bench seat in the luggage compartment* (Estate) i The folding bench seat in the luggage 1 Rear-seat heating i The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately five minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out. 86 compartment* is only suitable for persons no more than 1.40 m tall and weighing a maximum of 50 kg. Secure children as recommended (Y page 47). The combined luggage cover and net must be fitted if you are using the folding bench seat. G Risk of injury Make sure that the seat belt is correctly routed across the body and that the seat belt tongue is engaged in the buckle. G Risk of injury Only replace damaged covers with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. This applies even if they are secured by a child restraint system. Make sure that luggage and other items are adequately secured. People could otherwise be injured as a result of the load being thrown around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. If you are using the folding bench seat in the luggage compartment, the backrests on the rear bench seat must be upright and locked. Only start the journey once the head restraints for the folding bench seat are correctly positioned. Adjust the head restraint so that the back of the seat occupant's head is supported at about eye level. This reduces the risk of injury to the child in an accident. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 87 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats Folding out the folding bench seat 3 Seat belt retainers 1 Backrest release handle 2 Seat cushion release handle X X Hook the seat belts into retainers 3. X Pull release handle 2 and fold the folding bench seat cushion into the sitting position. X Push down the seat cushion until the backrest engages fully. rest to a more upright position in order to be able to sit more comfortably on the folding bench seat (Y page 198). X Fold the head restraints upwards. Move the handle for the combined luggage cover and net upwards (Y page 201). i You must remove the seat cushion if you Make sure that the backrests of the rear bench seat are locked in the upright position. i You can move the rear bench seat back- X X Pull release handle 1 and fold the backrest of the folding bench seat upwards. 1 Seat guides 2 Seat cushion X To remove: fold seat cushion 2 upwards and remove it from seat guides 1. Fitting and removing the seat cushion wish to lift the luggage compartment floor, e.g. if the vehicle has a flat tyre. Z 87 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 88 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seats X To fit: guide seat cushion 2 into seat guides 1 at a slight angle from the rear 3. X Fold seat cushion 2 back into its original position 4 until it engages. Folding back the folding bench seat 1 Release button on the bottom of the head restraint Press release button 1 and fold the head restraints down. X Press release catch 1 and push the head restraints in fully. ! To prevent damage, you must insert the X Fold backrest 2 of the folding bench seat into its original position until it engages. X 1 Tab 2 Backrest X Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab 1 and fold it back into its original position until it engages. 88 1 Release catch 2 Backrest head restraints fully into their guides and engage the belt buckles in their guides. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 89 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Steering wheel Steering wheel Points to remember Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can adjust the steering wheel either manually or electrically*. G Risk of injury The electrically adjustable steering wheel* can be adjusted when the key is removed from the ignition lock. Therefore, do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle as they could become trapped as the steering wheel is adjusted. When you adjust the steering wheel, make sure that: Rthe steering wheel can be reached with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely X Pull handle 1 out completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Set the desired steering wheel position. X Push handle 1 in completely until it engages fully. The steering wheel is locked in position. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly Adjusting the steering wheel manually Adjusting the steering wheel electrically* G Risk of accident Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. You might otherwise drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position. As a result you could be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unexpected movement of the steering wheel and thereby cause an accident. The steerability of the vehicle is however not affected. 1 Release handle 2 Steering column height 3 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment 1 Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment 2 Steering column height X Press the lever in direction of arrow 1 or 2 until the steering wheel has moved into the desired position. You can find more information under: * optional 89 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 90 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Steering wheel REasy-entry/exit RStoring feature (Y page 90) settings (Y page 93) Steering wheel heating* Easy-entry/exit feature* The easy-entry/exit feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. The steering wheel swings upwards when you: Rremove the key from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door when the key is in the ignition lock or in position 1. The steering wheel is moved automatically to the position previously set when the key is inserted into the ignition lock with the driver's door closed. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could open the driver's door and thereby unintentionally activate the easy-entry feature and become trapped. The most recent position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store a memory position (Y page 93). You can activate and deactivate the easyentry/exit feature via the on-board computer (Y page 138). G Risk of injury 1 To switch on the steering-wheel heating 2 To switch off the steering-wheel heating 3 Indicator lamp X To switch on or off: make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn the lever in direction of arrow 1 or 2. Indicator lamp 3 lights up or goes out. i The steering-wheel heating does not switch off automatically. 90 Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you activate the easy-entry/exit feature. If there is a risk of becoming trapped, stop the adjustment procedure. To halt the procedure: Rpress the steering-column adjustment switch Rpress one of the memory function position buttons The steering column stops moving immediately. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 91 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Mirrors Mirrors Exterior mirrors Rear-view mirror G Risk of accident X Adjust the rear-view mirror by hand so you have a good overview of the traffic conditions. Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle) The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects are actually closer than they appear. You could misjudge the distance from vehicles driving behind and cause an accident, e.g. when changing lane. For this reason, make sure of the actual distance from the vehicle driving behind by glancing over your shoulder. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. At low outside temperatures the exterior mirrors are heated automatically. 2 Adjustment button 3 Right-hand exterior mirror X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button 3 for the right-hand exterior mirror or button 1 for the left-hand exterior mirror. X Press adjustment button 2 up, down, to the right or to the left until the exterior mirror is set to a position which provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically* Adjusting the exterior mirrors 1 Anti-dazzle switch X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle switch 1 forwards or back. 1 To fold the exterior mirrors in or out Z 1 Left-hand exterior mirror * optional 91 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 92 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Mirrors X X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. Briefly press button 1. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i If you are driving faster than 47 km/h, you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while the vehicle is in motion; otherwise, they may vibrate. Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or has become discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. Otherwise, they will not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the on-board computer (Y page 139). X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button 1. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically* If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 139): 92 RThe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. RThe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or frontpassenger door. extended, the mirrors' automatic anti-dazzle function will not operate. Incident light could then dazzle you. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. In this case, adjust the rear-view mirror manually. i If you have activated this function and fold in the exterior mirrors using button 1, they will not be folded out automatically. You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button 1. Parking aid* The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves into the parking position as soon as you engage reverse gear. Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors* The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antidazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror. The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged and the interior lighting is switched on. G Risk of accident If the incident light from headlamps cannot strike the sensor in the rear-view mirror, for instance when the rear window blind* is 1 Exterior mirror on the driver's side 2 Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 93 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Memory functions* X Make sure that parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side is stored with the memory function (Y page 94). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that button 2 for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side is pressed in. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 10 km/h Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button 1 for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory functions* Storing settings You can store up to three different settings using the memory button. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: RPosition of the seat, backrest and head restraint RDynamic vated RDriver's driving seat*: activated/deacti- side: steering-wheel position RDriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides G Risk of injury The memory function can be used when the key has been removed. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. They could otherwise become trapped when moving the seat or the steering wheel. G Risk of accident Only use the memory function on the driver’s side when the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise be distracted from the * optional traffic conditions by the steering wheel and seat moving of their own accord, and cause an accident. 1 Storage position switches 1, 2, 3 2 Memory button M X Adjust the seat (Y page 77). X On the driver's side, also adjust the steering wheel (Y page 89) and the mirrors (Y page 91). X Press memory button M 2. X Press one of storage position switches 1, 2 or 3 1 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. 93 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 94 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Memory functions* Calling up a stored setting G Risk of accident Only use the memory function on the driver’s side when the vehicle is stationary. You could otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions by the steering wheel and seat moving of their own accord, and cause an accident. X Press and hold the relevant storage position switch 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and mirrors are in the stored position. Storing a parking position To make it easier to park, you can store the front-passenger side exterior mirror position in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store a parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using the memory button. You will find information about using the exterior mirror's parking position in the "Parking aid" section (Y page 92). i The setting procedure is interrupted as X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button 3 for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Use button 2 to adjust the exterior mirror to a position which allows you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. X Press memory button M 4. X Press one of the arrows on adjustment button 2 within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. i If the mirror moves out of position, repeat soon as you release the storage position switch. the steps. You can adjust the exterior mirror again after storing the setting. 1 Exterior mirror on the driver's side 2 Adjustment button 3 Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side 4 Memory button M 94 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 95 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seat belts Seat belts Wearing seat belts Seat belts are the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with the vehicle interior. G Risk of injury A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or which has not been engaged in the seat belt buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended protective function. Under certain circumstances this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. Make sure that all occupants – in particular, pregnant women – wear their seat belt correctly at all times. RThe seat belt must pass closely over your body and must not be twisted. You should therefore avoid wearing bulky clothing (e.g. a winter coat). The shoulder belt section must be routed across the middle of your shoulder – on no account across your neck or under your arm – and pulled tight against your upper body. The lap belt must always pass across your lap as low down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not across your abdomen. If necessary, push down the belt strap slightly and then retighten it in the roll-up direction. RDo not route the belt strap across sharp or fragile objects, especially if these are located on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pencils, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could be damaged and tear in an accident and you or other vehicle occupants could be injured. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Children must never travel sitting on the lap of other occupants. It would not be possible to restrain the child in the event of a sudden change in direction, braking or an accident. This could result in severe or even fatal injuries to the child and other occupants. RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly. For this reason, secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in specially designed, suitable restraint systems. RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under 12 years of age cannot wear the seat belts properly. Therefore, always secure these children in suitable child restraint systems on suitable vehicle seats. You can find more information under "Children in the vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Owner's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when fitting the child restraint system. RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. G Risk of injury The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection unless the backrest is almost vertical. Under certain circumstances this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. Before starting a journey, make sure that the seat is properly adjusted and that the backrest is almost vertical. G Risk of injury A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that has been subjected to a load in an accident or modified no longer offers the intended level of protection. Under certain circumstances this could cause severe or even fatal injuries. Z 95 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 96 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seat belts Routing the belt For this reason, check regularly that the seat belts are not damaged or dirty. Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to a load in an accident replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Choose a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools for the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to an almost vertical position (Y page 77). X Pull the belt smoothly through belt sash guide 1. X Route the belt over the centre of the shoulder without twisting it. X Engage belt tongue 2 into buckle 3. X If necessary, adjust the belt to the appropriate height (Y page 97). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the belt to tighten the belt across your body. Routing the belt 1 Belt sash guide 2 Belt tongue 3 Buckle 4 Release button 96 X Press release button 4 and guide belt tongue 2 back towards belt sash guide 1. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 97 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seat belts Belt warning for driver and front passenger The < seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster reminds you that all occupants should fasten their seat belts. The < seat belt warning lamp may light up continuously or it may flash. Additionally, there may be a warning tone. The < seat belt warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases when the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. For certain countries only: regardless of whether the driver or the front passenger is already secured, the < seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after the engine has been started. The < seat belt warning lamp then goes out if both the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belt. i Further information about the < seat belt warning lamp (Y page 290). Belt height adjustment You can adjust the seat belt height on the following seats: RDriver's Slide the belt sash guide downwards. X Let go of release button 1 and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged. seat RFront-passenger ROuter X seat Correct driver's seat position rear seats Adjust the belt to a height that allows it to be routed across the middle of your shoulder. 1 Release catch X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold release button 1. 1 Steering wheel 2 Seat belt 3 Seat Z 97 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 98 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Seat belts G Risk of accident Make sure that: It should: Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted from the road and traffic conditions and you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the seat moving. This could cause an accident. Ryou are as far away from the driver's front Rfit airbag as possible X are sitting in a normal upright posi- Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly tion Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position G Risk of accident Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is stationary and do not pull away until the steering wheel adjustment mechanism is locked in position. You might otherwise drive without the steering wheel adjustment mechanism being locked in position. As a result you could be distracted from road and traffic conditions by an unexpected movement of the steering wheel and thereby cause an accident. The steerability of the vehicle is however not affected. Ryou Ryou have set the seat angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly Ryou have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the central area of the head restraint X Check whether steering wheel 1 is adjusted properly (Y page 89). Make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your Check whether seat 3 and the head restraint are adjusted properly (Y page 77). arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- ment cluster clearly X 98 Check whether you have fastened seat belt 2 properly (Y page 95). snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rrouted joints in your pelvic area across the hip Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 99 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Lights ! Switch off the side lamps or parking lamp Lights when you leave the vehicle. This prevents the battery from discharging. Light switch For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, daytime operation of headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. In these countries, the dippedbeam headlamps are automatically switched on when the engine is started. i If you drive in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road to the country where the vehicle is registered, oncoming traffic may be dazzled by the asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps. Have the headlamps changed to symmetrical dipped beam when driving in these countries. You can obtain information about this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Dipped-beam headlamps $ a Left-hand parking lamp % g Right-hand parking lamp & M Lights off/constant headlamp mode ( U Automatic headlamp mode/con- stant headlamp mode ) C Side lamps, licence plate and instru- ment lighting * B Dipped-beam headlamps or mainbeam headlamps , ¥ Foglamps . † Rear foglamp i The exterior lighting automatically switches off when you remove the key from the ignition lock or open the door while the ignition is switched off (ignition key in position 0). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 of the ignition lock or that the engine is running. X To switch on: turn the light switch to B. The dipped-beam headlamps, parking lamps and licence plate lamps are switched on. The green dipped-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster light up. Constant headlamp mode In countries in which constant headlamp mode is not a legal requirement, you can make this setting using the on-board computer. You can activate or deactivate "constant headlamp mode" using the on-board computer (Y page 135). Z 99 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 100 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Lights X To switch on: turn the light switch to M or U. The dipped-beam headlamps, side lamps and licence plate lamp are switched on when the engine is running. i When you turn the light switch to any position other than M or U, the corresponding light goes on. Automatic headlamp mode The side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps and licence plate lamp are switched on or off automatically, depending on the brightness of the ambient light. G Risk of accident When the light switch is set to U, the lights are not switched on automatically in foggy conditions. This could endanger you and others. Therefore, turn the light switch to B in darkness and fog. Automatic headlamp mode is only a driving aid. You are responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times. 100 G Risk of accident G Risk of accident When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch from U to B in good time. You could otherwise cause an accident if the headlamps were to switch off temporarily. When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch from U to B in good time. You could otherwise cause an accident if the headlamps were to switch off temporarily. X To switch on: turn the light switch to U. The side lamps are switched on and off automatically when the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. The dipped-beam headlamps, side lamps and licence plate lamp are switched on automatically when the engine is running. When the dipped-beam headlamps are switched on, the green dipped-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When the light switch is set to U you cannot switch on the front or rear foglamps. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on the front foglamps: turn the light switch to the B or C position. X Pull the light switch out to the first stop. The ¥ green indicator lamp next to the light switch lights up. X To switch on the rear foglamp: turn the light switch to B or C. X Pull the light switch out to the second detent. The † yellow indicator lamp next to the light switch lights up. X To switch off the front foglamps/rear foglamps: push in the light switch to the stop. The corresponding indicator lamp goes out. Front foglamps/Rear foglamp G Risk of accident If you suspect that driving conditions will be foggy, turn the light switch to B before you start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle may not be visible and you could therefore endanger yourself and others. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 101 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Lights Combination switch (turn signals, main-beam headlamps and headlamp flasher) Turn signal Combination switch 1 Right-hand turn signal 2 Left-hand turn signal X briefly in the appropriate direction. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. Main-beam headlamps/headlamp flasher Combination switch 1 Main-beam headlamp 2 Headlamp flasher Main-beam headlamp X Make sure that the key is in position 2 of the ignition lock or that the engine is running. X Turn the light switch to B or U16. X To switch on: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. The main-beam indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The main-beam indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster goes out. Headlamp flasher X To switch on: briefly pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 2. To switch on: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or 2. The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp K or L in the instrument cluster flashes. i If you only wish to indicate a minor change of direction, press the combination switch 16 In Z the U position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark. 101 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 102 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Lights Hazard warning lamps Adjusting the headlamp range (vehicles with halogen headlamps) The headlamp range control allows you to adjust the cone of light from the headlamps according to how your vehicle is laden. You can only adjust the headlamp range while the engine is running. Position Load 2 Front and rear seats occupied, boot laden 3 Driver's seat or both front seats occupied, boot laden Centre console 1 Hazard warning lamp button X X To activate: press hazard warning lamp button 1. All turn signals flash. If you now activate a turn signal, only those turn signal lamps on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. To deactivate: press hazard warning lamp button 1. 102 Saloon 1 Thumbwheel for headlamp range Position Load 0 Front seats occupied 1 Front and rear seats occupied Estate 1 Thumbwheel for headlamp range Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 103 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Lights Position Load -1 Front and rear seats occupied or Front and rear seats occupied, luggage compartment laden 0 Front seats occupied 1 Driver's seat occupied, luggage compartment laden X Turn thumbwheel for headlamp range 1 to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. Headlamp cleaning system* The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with windscreen washer fluid" function is operated five times while the lights are on and the engine is running. When you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0. Intelligent Light System* (vehicles with bi-xenon headlamps*) The Intelligent Light System adapts the lighting of the front headlamps to the prevailing driving conditions so that the road is illuminated better. i The Intelligent Light System is only active when it is dark. The Intelligent Light System comprises: RActive light function RCornering light function RMotorway mode RExtended * optional range foglamps Active light function For the active light function, the dipped-beam headlamps swivel horizontally. The swivel angle changes according to the respective driving situation. The active light function is not active when the vehicle is stationary. Cornering light function Specially designed headlamps light up the area into which you are driving when turning corners. If you are driving at speeds below 40 km/h, the cornering light function is activated either by the turn signals or when the steering wheel is turned. If you are driving at speeds above 40 km/h the cornering light function is deactivated. Switching on X Make sure that the engine is running. X Switch on the dipped-beam headlamps. X Switch off the fog lights. X Switch on the turn signal. The cornering light on the same side as the turn signal comes on, even if you turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction after indicating. 103 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 104 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Lights or X Turn the steering wheel in the desired direction. When in a forwards gear: the cornering lamp on the inside of the bend comes on. When in reverse gear: the cornering light on the outside of the bend comes on. Switching off X Turn the steering wheel back to the straight ahead position. The turn signal switches off. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time. or X Switch off the turn signal. The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time. The cornering light will go out after a maximum of three minutes. Motorway mode Motorway mode optimises the illumination of the road by: Rcontrolling the brightness Radapting 104 the headlamp range Motorway mode is activated if you are driving faster than 110 km/h and do not make any large steering movements for 1,000 m. Interior lighting Front overhead control panel Extended range foglamps The extended range foglamps reduce the glare experienced by the driver and improve the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. X To switch on: switch on the rear foglamp. The front foglamps and the rear foglamp are switched on. The extended range foglamps are activated if you are driving slower than 70 km/h. X To switch off: switch off the rear foglamp. i The extended range foglamps switch off automatically when you drive faster than 100 km/h. Front overhead control panel 1 X To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off 2 ò To switch the rear interior lighting on/off 3 ¡ To switch the automatic function on/off 4 X To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off 5 ð To switch the front interior lighting on/off Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 105 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Windscreen wipers Automatic function X To switch on/off: press the ¡ button. Rear-compartment overhead control panel The interior lighting switches on if it is dark when you: Runlock Ropen Windscreen wipers Switching the windscreen wipers on/ off the vehicle a door Rremove the key from the ignition lock The interior lighting switches off after a delay. You can set the delayed switch-off using the on-board computer. i If the door is left open, the interior lighting goes out after approximately five minutes. Manual control Front interior lighting X To switch on/off: press the ð button. Rear-compartment interior lighting X To switch on/off: press the ¦ button. Front reading lamps X To switch on/off: press the X button. Rear-compartment overhead control panel 1 X To switch the left-hand reading lamp on/off 2 X To switch the right-hand reading lamp on/off Combination switch 1 To switch on the windscreen wipers Rear-compartment reading lamps X To switch on/off: press the X button. Settings: 2 Single wipe/to wipe the windscreen using washer fluid M Windscreen wipers off U Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) V Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) Z 105 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 106 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Windscreen wipers u Continuous wipe, slow t Continuous wipe, fast Intermittent wipe/rain sensor X ! If the windscreen becomes dirty in dry weather conditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The various wiper settings can be selected as follows: Single wipe X Briefly press the combination switch to the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2. Wiping with washer fluid X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2. 106 Rear window wiper (Estate) Depending on the intensity of the rain, turn the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 to position U or V. The rain sensor is activated. The appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. Continuous wipe X Depending on the intensity of the rain, turn the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 to position u or t. Switching off the windscreen wipers X Turn the combination switch to position M. Combination switch 1 Switch % To wipe with washer fluid & To switch on intermittent wiping ( To switch off intermittent wiping ) To wipe with washer fluid Intermittent wipe X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: turn switch 1 to position &. X To switch off: turn switch 1 to position (. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 107 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Side windows Wiping with washer fluid X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in the ignition lock. X Turn switch 1 to position % or position ) and hold it there until the rear window has been cleaned. The rear window is wiped for a further five seconds after the switch is released. Side windows G Risk of injury Opening/closing the side windows Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could: Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts of the vehicle G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame as a side window is opened. Do not touch or lean against the side window during the opening procedure. You could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the window moves down. If danger threatens, release the switch or pull the switch upwards to close the side window again. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close a side window. If danger threatens, release the switch or press the switch a second time to open the side window again. G Risk of injury Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by prolonged exposure to extremely high or extremely low temperatures If children open a door, they could: Rseriously or even fatally injure other people Rget out of the vehicle, thereby injuring themselves or be seriously or even fatally injured by a passing vehicle Activate the child-proof locks if children are travelling in the vehicle. They could otherwise open doors or windows while the vehicle is in motion and thereby injure themselves or others. i It is also possible to open and close the side windows from the outside using the "Summer opening" (Y page 109) and "convenience closing" (Y page 109) features respectively. Z 107 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 108 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Side windows i You can disable the controls for the rear side windows from the driver's seat (Y page 47). i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the side X i When the key is turned to position 0 or removed from the ignition lock, it is still possible to operate the windows until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened, but for no longer than five minutes. windows close automatically, leaving a small gap. The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the respective window. Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open or close: press the switch down or pull it up beyond the pressure point and hold it until the corresponding window is in the desired position. X To open or close fully: press the switch down or pull it up beyond the pressure point and release it. X To stop: briefly press the switch down or pull it up. Closing with increased force and without the anti-entrapment feature Switches on the driver's door 1 Front left 2 Front right 3 Rear right 4 Rear left 108 G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped and a serious or even fatal injury is not caused as you close a side window with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature. If a side window locks up during closing and has reopened again slightly: X Immediately after the window locks up, pull the switch upwards until the window is fully closed. The side window is closed with more force. If a side window locks up again during closing and has reopened again slightly: X Immediately after the window locks up, pull the switch upwards until the window is fully closed. The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature. Resetting the windows Each side window must be reset if the battery was disconnected or discharged. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the switch upwards until the window is closed, and hold it in this position for another second. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 109 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Side windows X You can ventilate the vehicle before a journey. To do this, you can use the key to simultaneously: Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the k button. Ropen X Press and hold the k button until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are in the desired position. Summer opening the side windows Ropen the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof* and the roller sunblinds* Rswitch on the seat ventilation* i The "Summer opening" feature can only be operated via the key. If the roller sunblinds* of the panorama sliding sunroof* are closed, the roller sunblinds* are opened first. X Press and hold the k button again until the panorama sliding sunroof* is in the desired position. G Risk of injury Make sure nobody can become trapped when using the convenience closing feature. Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrapment: With the key: RRelease the j button. RPress and hold the k button until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof* open again. With KEYLESS GO*: RRelease handle. the locking button on the door RPull Convenience closing When you lock the vehicle, you can close the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof* simultaneously. On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof* you can then close the roller sunblinds*. the door handle immediately and hold it. The side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or the panorama sliding sunroof* open. Z * optional 109 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 110 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving and parking With the key With KEYLESS GO*: Driving and parking Starting the engine G Risk of accident X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle. X Lock the vehicle with the j button. X Keep the button pressed until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are closed. On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof*: X Press and hold the j button again until the roller sunblinds* of the panorama sliding sunroof* close. 110 1 Locking button on the door handle X X Keep locking button 1 on the door handle pressed until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are fully closed. Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* are closed. On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof*: X Press and hold locking button 1 again until the roller sunblinds* of the panorama sliding sunroof* close. Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. If you use a floormat or carpet in the driver's footwell, make sure that they are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Objects could otherwise get between the pedals in the event of sudden braking or acceleration. You may then no longer be able to brake, change gear or accelerate as intended. This may result in an accident and injury. G Risk of poisoning Never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes constitutes a health hazard and could lead to loss of consciousness or even death. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. i If you depress the brake when starting the engine, pedal travel will be unusually long and there will be less pedal resistance. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 111 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving and parking Manual transmission X Shift to neutral. X Depress the parking brake (Y page 113). Further information about the manual transmission (Y page 115). P R N D Park position with selector lever lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive position X Before starting, make sure P is selected. i The engine can also be started when the selector lever is in position N. Further information about the automatic transmission (Y page 115). Starting the engine with the key i Vehicles with automatic transmission*: You can also use the "touch-start" function. To do this, turn the key to position 3 and * optional release it immediately. The engine then starts automatically. Automatic transmission* X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 76) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 76). The q preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X When the q preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the key to position 3 (Y page 76) and release it. The engine starts automatically. i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm. Starting the engine with KEYLESS GO* G Risk of injury Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEYLESS GO key*. For this reason, children should never be left unsupervised in the vehicle. Always take the KEYLESS GO key* with you when leaving the vehicle, Z 111 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 112 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving and parking even if you are only leaving it for a short time. The KEYLESS GO button can be used to start the vehicle without inserting the key in the ignition lock. The KEYLESS GO button is on the selector lever. X Depress the brake pedal. The selector lever lock is released. X Petrol engine: press KEYLESS GO button 1 once. The engine starts automatically. X Diesel engine: press KEYLESS GO button 1 once. Preglow is activated and the engine starts automatically. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine tempera- tures (below + 20 °C), the maximum engine speed is limited in order to protect the engine. Avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold in order to protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 137). i You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm: X Press and hold KEYLESS GO button 1 until the engine is running. Manual transmission Pulling away 1 KEYLESS GO button ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only shift into reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. 112 X Depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to either first or reverse gear. X Pull the parking brake release handle to release the parking brake. X Slowly release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal. ! Change gear in good time and avoid spin- ning the wheels. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 113 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving and parking Automatic transmission* Parking i It is only possible to move the selector G Risk of accident lever to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the selector lever lock released. X Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. X Pull the parking brake release handle to release the parking brake. X Move the selector lever to position D or R. i Wait for the shift process to complete before pulling away. X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Parking brake Only remove the key from the ignition lock when the vehicle is stationary since you cannot steer the vehicle with the key removed. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could release the parking brake. This could lead to a serious or fatal accident. G Risk of fire Make sure that the exhaust system does not under any circumstances come into contact with easily ignitable material such as dry grass or petrol. The material could otherwise ignite and set the vehicle on fire. 1 Release handle 2 Parking brake X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. On vehicles with automatic transmission*, the selector lever lock is released. X Pull release handle 1. X The 3 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To apply: depress parking brake 2 firmly. The 3 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the engine is running. i On steep slopes, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. * optional 113 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 114 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Transmission Switching off the engine G Risk of accident If the engine is not running, there is no power assistance for the steering and brakes. Steering and braking then takes much more effort. As a result, you might lose control of the vehicle, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Do not switch off the engine while driving. Vehicles with manual transmission X Shift to either first or reverse gear. X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 76) in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. Using KEYLESS GO* X Press and hold the KEYLESS GO button (Y page 77). The engine stops and all the lamps in the instrument cluster go out (Y page 26). Transmission Introduction to the transmission G Risk of accident The movement of the pedals must not be impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floormats or carpets are correctly secured and that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Vehicles with automatic transmission* X Move the selector lever to P. Using the key X Turn the key to position 0(Y page 76) in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobiliser is activated. 114 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 115 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Transmission Manual transmission X Move the gear lever firmly to the left beyond the point of resistance and then forwards. Automatic transmission* When the selector lever is in position D, you can influence the gearshifts made by the automatic transmission by: Rrestricting the shift range Rchanging gear yourself Selector lever positions ì ! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear, you must press the shift lever to the right. You could otherwise shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the transmission. Do not exceed the maximum speed for the individual gears. If you shift down at too high a speed (transmission braking), this can cause the engine to overspeed, leading to engine damage. Engaging reverse gear ! Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary, otherwise the transmission could be damaged. * optional Park position Prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only move the selector lever to P when the vehicle is stationary. i The key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. If the key is removed from the ignition lock, the selector lever is locked in position P. í Reverse gear Only move the selector lever to R when the vehicle is stationary. 1 Selector lever position 2 Gearshift program (S/C) or (S/C/M)* The current shift range and gearshift program (S/C) or (S/C/M)* appear in the display of the speedometer. Z 115 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 116 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Transmission ë ê Neutral Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. Do not move the selector lever to N while you are driving. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only move the selector lever to N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. One-touch gearshifting When the selector lever is in position D, you can perform gearshifts yourself, even on vehicles with automatic transmission. X To shift up: briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear, depending on the gearshift pro- 116 gram selected. This also extends the shift range. X To shift down: briefly press the selector lever to the left towards D–. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear, depending on the gear currently selected. This also restricts the shift range. i To prevent the engine from overrevving, the automatic transmission does not shift down if you push the selector lever towards D– while driving at too high a speed. X X To derestrict the shift range: press and hold the selector lever towards D+ until D is shown once more in the display. The automatic transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D. To select the most effective shift range: press and hold the selector lever to the left towards D–. The automatic transmission will shift to a range which allows ideal acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic transmission will shift down one or more gears. Shift ranges When the selector lever is in position D, it is possible to restrict or derestrict the shift range for the automatic transmission. X Briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+ or to the left towards D–. The shift range selected is shown in the display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected gear. i If the maximum engine speed for the shift range is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission shifts up in order to prevent the engine from overrevving even if the shift range is restricted. Driving situation è The braking effect of the engine can be used in this position. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 117 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Transmission ç æ To use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving: Ron steep mountain roads Rin mountainous terrain Rin arduous conditions To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downhill gradients and long downhill stretches. Program selector button S Sport C Comfort For all normal driving conditions For comfort mode ! Only press program selector button 1 when the selector lever is in position P, N or D. X Press program selector button 1 repeatedly until the letter (C/S) for the desired gearshift program appears in the speedometer display. Comfort mode C is characterised by the following: Ran increase in traction. This improves the driving stability of the vehicle on slippery road surfaces, for example. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels are less likely to spin. 1 Program selector button Driving tips Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Trailer towing X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2 (Y page 116) depending on the incline of the uphill or downhill gradient, even if cruise control* is activated. Z * optional 117 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 118 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Transmission Steering wheel gearshift paddles* and manual gearshift program* Steering wheel gearshift paddles It is possible to shift gear using either the steering wheel gearshift paddles or the selector lever. Downshifting G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. X Pull left-hand paddle 1. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. If you are not driving in manual gearshift program M, the shift range will be restricted. i When the selector lever is in position P, 1 Left-hand paddle: to shift down 2 Right-hand paddle: to shift up Upshifting X Pull right-hand paddle 2. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. If you are not driving in manual gearshift program M, then the shift range will be derestricted. 118 shift paddles or the selector lever. The manual gearshift program M can be selected using the program selector button. N or R, you cannot change gear using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. If the manual gearshift programme M has been selected and you restart the engine, the automatic transmission will switch to an automatic gearshift program. If the automatic gearshift program S or C has been selected, the automatic transmission will resume the corresponding gearshift program when you restart the engine. Manual gearshift program In the manual gearshift program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel gear- 1 Program selector button S Sport For all normal driving conditions C Comfort For comfort mode M Manual For manual gearshifting X To activate: press program selector button 1 repeatedly until M appears in the display. If the selector lever is in position D, you can shift up or down through the gears. The gear * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 119 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Transmission currently selected and engaged is shown in the display. next to the gear indicator, instructing you to shift up. Upshifting X Briefly press the selector lever to the right towards D+ Downshifting or X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 118). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. X Vehicles with AMG engines or ! In manual gearshift program M, the auto- X X Briefly press the selector lever to the left towards D- i It is not possible to shift gears using the steering wheel gearshift paddles during kickdown. Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift paddle (Y page 118). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. matic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. You must make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the rev counter. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. i For maximum acceleration, pull the left- Shift up a gear when the ^ upshift symbol appears in the display instead of M. i It is not possible to use kickdown in the When the AMG display is switched on, the display colour changes to red and UP appears You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual gearshift program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. hand steering wheel gearshift paddle until the transmission selects the optimum gear for the current speed. Kickdown manual gearshift program M on vehicles with AMG engines. Z 119 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 120 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Instrument cluster Instrument cluster Points to remember Activating the multi-function display X Switch on the ignition. X You will find a full overview of the instrument cluster in the "At a glance" section (Y page 26). G Risk of accident No further messages can be displayed if the instrument cluster and/or the multi-function display fails. This means that you will not see information about the driving situation, such as the speed, outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, display messages or system failures. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. Adjust your driving style and speed accordingly. Immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 120 Adjusting the instrument cluster lighting Brighter or dimmer: turn reset button 1 clockwise or anti-clockwise. Coolant temperature gauge 1 Reset button The multi-function display also switches on when you Rpress reset button 1 Ropen a door Rswitch on the lights The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified concentration of antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor, the coolant temperature may rise to 120 † The coolant temperature may rise to the top end of the scale at high outside temperatures and on long uphill stretches. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 121 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer Resetting the trip meter X Select the standard display menu (Y page 125). X Press and hold reset button 1 until the trip meter is reset. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. Cruise control mode: The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. Distronic* mode: One or two segments around the stored speed light up. Variable Speedtronic mode: The segments light up from the start of the scale to the selected limit speed. Rev counter The red band in the rev counter indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range. Doing so will damage the engine. H Environmental note Avoid driving at high engine speeds, as this increases your vehicle's consumption unnecessarily and pollutes the environment through increased emissions. Outside temperature display G Risk of accident The road surface may be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges, even if temperatures are just above freezing point. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. You should therefore always adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather conditions. On-board computer Points to remember The on-board computer is activated as soon as the key is turned to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can use the on-board computer to call up information relating to your vehicle and to make and adjust settings. You can call up the next service due date, select the display language for the instrument cluster and set other functions. G Risk of accident Only use the on-board computer when road and traffic conditions permit. You would otherwise be distracted and unable to concentrate properly on driving, and could cause an accident. The on-board computer shows information in the multi-function display. There is a short delay before a change in outside temperature is displayed. * optional Z 121 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 122 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer Multi-function steering wheel You can control the multi-function display and the settings in the on-board computer with the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. 1 Multi-function display 2 æ ç RSelects submenus in the Settings... menu RChanges RAdjusts values the volume 3 s Accepts or rejects a call* t 4 è Selecting menus: scrolls forÿ wards or back 5 j Press briefly to scroll back k and forth in a menu. In the Audio/TV*/ DVD*menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene*. In the Telephone* menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or phone number. j Press and hold in the Audio/ k TV*/DVD* menu: selects the next/previous station or selects an audio track using rapid scrolling. Press and hold in the Telephone* menu: starts rapid scrolling through the telephone book. Several functions are combined thematically in the menus. For example, the Audio/TV*/DVD* menu contains functions for operating the radio or DVD player. The functions can be used to either look up information or to change settings for your vehicle. 122 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 123 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer You can think of the configuration of the menus and the functions within a menu as a circle: X Press the è orÿ button repeatedly to call up individual menus in sequence. X Multi-function display The multi-function display shows you values and settings as well as any display messages that may have been generated. Press the j or k button to call up the functions within a menu. Unlike other menus, the Settings menu contains a number of submenus (Y page 131). The number of menus depends on the equipment in your vehicle. 1 Display area for menus or submenus 2 Status bar with outside temperature or speed (Y page 134) 3 Trip meter Z 123 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, Controls On-board computer Menus and submenus 124 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 124 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 125 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer Function Function 1 Basic display menu (Y page 125) RDigital speedometer17 (Y page 126) ROutside temperature17 (Y page 126) RASSYST PLUS service display (Y page 243) REngine oil level* (Y page 223) RTyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 230) or tyre pressure monitor* (Y page 232) 2 AMG* menu (Y page 126) 3 Audio/TV*/DVD* (Y page 129) menu RRadio station (Y page 129) RAudio drive or media (Y page 129) RTV* (Y RDVD 17 The 18 This page 130) video* (Y page 130) 4 Navigation* menu (Y page 130) 5 Distronic* menu (distance display) (Y page 145) 6 Message memory menu18 (fault and warning messages) (Y page 131) 7 Settings menu (Y page 131) RResetting to factory settings (Y page 132) RSelecting a submenu (Y page 132) 8 Trip computer menu RConsumption statistics (Y page 140) RRange (Y menus. The terms themselves are not always displayed in the multi-function display. The Audio, Navi* and Tel* menus are displayed slightly differently in vehicles with audio equipment and vehicles with COMAND APS*. The examples given in this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND APS*. Standard display menu i Menu overview: (Y page 124). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press the è or · button to select the basic display. page 140) 9 Telephone* menu (Y page 141) This is what the displays look like when you scroll through the menus. The generic terms in the table overview are intended to help you navigate through the Z sequence of the digital speedometer and the outside temperature display depends on the settings in the "Basic display" submenu. menu is only visible if there is a display message available. * optional 125 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 126 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer Displaying the digital speedometer or outside temperature Basic display 1 Outside temperature 2 Trip meter Instead of outside temperature 1, you can opt to display the digital speedometer19 (Y page 134). You can select the following functions in the Basic display menu by pressing the j or k button: Rdigital You can use the Basic display submenu (Y page 134) to select whether the first function listed in the Basic display menu is the digital speedometer or the outside temperature. X Press the è or · button to select the basic display. X PLUS service display (Y page 243) Routside Rtyre temperature20 pressure loss warning system (Y page 230) or tyre pressure monitor* (Y page 232) i Menu overview: see (Y page 124). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Press the è or · button to select the AMG menu. 1 Gear indicator 2 Upshift instruction RASSYST oil level* (Y page 223) These functions are only available on AMG vehicles. Press the j or k button to select the digital speedometer or the outside temperature. speedometer20 Rengine AMG* menu 3 Engine oil temperature Illustration showing the digital speedometer displayed 1 Digital speedometer 2 Status line with outside temperature 3 Trip meter In the manual gearshift program, the menu is displayed in red when the engine reaches the overrevving range. You will also see shift up instruction 2. Shift up 2 blocks other messages in the multi-function display until you have shifted up. 19 Vehicles 20 The 126 for the United Kingdom: the outside temperature is always displayed. sequence of the digital speedometer and the outside temperature display depends on the settings in the "Basic display" submenu. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 127 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer The engine oil temperature gauge flashes if the engine oil temperature has not reached 80 †. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. X Press the è or · button to select the AMG menu. X Press the j button repeatedly until the RACETIMER appears. Displaying the on-board voltage X Press the è or · button to select the AMG menu. X Press the j button repeatedly until the on-board voltage appears. 1 Gear indicator 2 RACETIMER 3 Lap 1 Gear indicator 2 On-board voltage RACETIMER The RACETIMER allows time measurements to be saved. While you have the RACETIMER displayed, you will not be able to adjust the volume using the æ and ç buttons. You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To start: press the æ button to start the RACETIMER. X To display the intermediate time: press the ç button to show the intermediate time. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X To stop: press the æ button to stop the RACETIMER. The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you stop the vehicle and turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. When you turn the key to position 2 or 3 and then press the æ button, timing is continued. Storing the lap time and starting a new lap It is possible to store a maximum of nine laps. X Press the ç button to show the intermediate time during timing. The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds. X Press the ç button again within 5 seconds. The displayed intermediate time is stored as a lap time. Timing starts for a new lap. The new lap is timed from when the intermediate time is called up. 1 Gear indicator 2 RACETIMER Z 127 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 128 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer 3 Fastest lap time (best lap) 4 Lap Resetting the current lap X Press the æ button to stop the RACETIMER. X Press the ç button to reset the lap time to "0". Deleting all laps If you have switched off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted. It is not possible to delete a single stored lap on its own. X Press the æ button to stop the RACETIMER. Overall evaluation This function is only available if you have stored at least one lap and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the è or · button to select the AMG menu. X Press the è or · button to select the AMG menu. X Press the j button repeatedly until a lap evaluation appears. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1. Press the j button repeatedly until the overall evaluation appears. 1 RACETIMER overall evaluation 2 Total time driven X Press the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster twice. 3 Top speed 4 Distance covered X Press the æ button to start the RACETIMER. All laps are deleted. 5 Average speed Lap evaluation This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. 128 X 1 Lap 2 Lap time 3 Top speed during lap 4 Lap length 5 Average lap speed X Press the j or k button to select a different lap evaluation. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 129 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer Audio/TV*/DVD* menu Use the functions in the Audio/TV/DVD menu to operate the audio equipment or COMAND APS*. If the audio equipment or COMAND APS* is switched off, the multifunction display shows the Audio off message. i Menu overview: see (Y page 124). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X To select a stored station: briefly press the j or k button. Operating the audio player or audio media* X To select a channel from the channel list: press and hold the j or k button. X To select a station using the station search (only if no station list is being received): press and hold the j or k button. Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment fitted in the vehicle. X Switch on the audio equipment or COMAND APS* and select the audio player or medium (see the separate operating instructions). Selecting a radio station You can only store new stations using the audio systemor COMAND APS*. Please refer to the separate operating instructions for notes on how to do this. X Switch on the audio equipment or COMAND APS* and select Radio (see the separate operating instructions). X Use the è or · button to select the Audio/TV/DVD menu. 1 Waveband (preset number, only if the X Use the è or · button to select the Audio/TV/DVD menu. X To select next/previous track: briefly press the j or k button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the j or k button. channel is stored) 2 Station i DAB*radio mode21 (Digital Audio Broadcasting) – see the separate operating instructions. Example 1 Current CD (for CD/DVD changer*) 2 Current track 21 Only Z for certain countries. * optional 129 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 130 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer In audio AUX mode, the current track is not displayed. Operating the TV* X Switch on COMAND and select TV (see the separate operating instructions). X Use the è or · button to select the Audio/TV/DVD menu. X To select a stored station: briefly press the j or k button. X To select a channel from the channel list: press and hold the j or k button. X To select a channel with the channel search (only if COMAND is not receiving a channel list): press and hold the j or k button. 1 Function (preset number, only if the chan- nel is stored) 130 2 Current channel Operating the DVD video* X Switch on COMAND and select DVD video (see the separate operating instructions). X Use the è or · button to select the Audio/TV/DVD menu. X Press the j or k button to select a scene. Navigation* menu In the Navigation menu, the multi-function display shows information from the navigation system. i Menu overview: see (Y page 124). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Switch on the audio equipment or COMAND APS* (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the è or · button to select the Navigation menu. Route guidance inactive 1 Disc number (only for DVD changer*) 2 Current scene The multi-function display shows the direction of travel and the street name, if it is known to the system. 1 Direction of travel 2 Street name * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 131 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer Route guidance active The following may appear in the multi-function display: Message memory menu X Press the è or · button repeatedly until either the original menu or the Message memory menu appears. If the Message memory menu does not appear, there are no display messages. If there are messages, the following message may appear in the multi-function display, for example: 2 messages. X Press the j or k button to call up a display message. You can scroll through the display messages in sequence. The possible display messages are explained in the "Practical advice" section (Y page 257). Previous display messages can be called up in the Message memory menu. You will only see the Message memory menu if there are any display messages. G Risk of accident Distronic* menu You can read the current Distronic settings in the Distronic menu (Y page 145). i Menu overview: (Y page 124). The on-board computer only records and displays messages and warnings from certain systems. For this reason, you should always make sure that your vehicle is safe to drive. You could otherwise cause an accident by driving an unsafe vehicle. Switching off the ignition clears the Message memory except for the highest priority display messages. The on-board computer will delete these display messages only after the reason for the message has been rectified. i Menu overview: see (Y page 124). Displaying messages Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. Settings menu There are two functions in the Settings... menu: the To reset: Press reset button for 3 seconds function, which you can use to reset most settings to the factory settings. And there are submenus via which you can make individual settings for your vehicle. i Menu overview: see (Y page 124). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. * optional 131 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 132 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer Resetting to factory settings Submenus in the Settings menu For safety reasons, not all functions are reset: permanent Speedtronic can only be set in the Vehicle menu. The Headlamp mode function in the Lighting submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press è or · to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. You will see the selection of submenus. There are more submenus available than simultaneously displayed. X X Press and hold the reset button on the lefthand side of the instrument cluster for approximately three seconds. A prompt appears in the multi-function display asking you to press the reset button again to confirm. Press the reset button again. The functions of most submenus are restored to the factory settings. If you want to retain the settings, do not press the reset button a second time. After approximately 5 seconds, the Settings... menu appears again. 22 This 132 Instrument cluster submenu RUnit of measurement for distance (Y page 133) RLanguage (Y RStatus RBasic page 133) line display (Y page 134) display (Y page 134) Time/date submenu22 X Press the æ or ç button to select a submenu. The selected submenu is highlighted. X Press the j button to select a function within a submenu. X Press the æ or ç button to change the setting. The changed setting is stored. X Press the è or ÿ button to select a different display. or X The following tables show the settings you can make in the individual submenus. You will find additional information on the pages shown. RSetting the date and time (Y page 134) function is not available on vehicles with Audio 50 APS* or COMAND APS*. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 133 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer Lighting submenu Convenience submenu* X RConstant headlamp mode (Y page 135) Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. REasy-entry/exit X RSurround lighting (Y page 135) RFold Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Instr. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Display unit Speed-/odometer. X Press the æ or ç button to select km (kilometres) or miles as the unit of measurement for distance. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. RAmbient lighting* (Y page 136) lighting delayed switch-off (Y page 136) feature* (Y page 138) in mirrors when locking the vehicle* (Y page 139) RExterior RInterior lighting delayed switch-off (Y page 136) RIntelligent Light System* (Y page 137) Vehicle submenu RPermanent RAutomatic Speedtronic (Y page 154) locking feature (Y page 137) Dynamic driving seat* submenu RSettings for the driver's and frontpassenger seat (Y page 139) Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe Heater* submenu RSelecting the switch-on time for the auxiliary heating* (Y page 137) RChanging the switch-on time for the aux- iliary heating* (Y page 138) total distance recorder and the trip meter Rthe trip computer Rthe digital speedometer23 Rcruise Selecting the language X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Instr. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Language. control RSpeedtronic RDistronic* Z 23 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the digital speedometer always displays km/h. * optional 133 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 134 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer X Use the æ or ç button to select the desired language. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Selecting the status line display Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is not available. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Instr. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Status line display. X Press the æ or ç button to select the display in the status line: outside temperature (Outside temp.) or speed (Speed). X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. 134 Selecting the basic display Setting the date and time Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this function is not available. You will see either the outside temperature or the digital speedometer first in the Basic display depending on the setting. You will see the display that is not selected when you scroll through the Basic display menu (Y page 125). X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. Your vehicle could have the following audio equipment: X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Instr. cluster submenu. X Press the j button to select Basic display. X Press the æ or ç button to select the basic display: outside temperature (Outside temp.) or speed (Speed). X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. A: Audio 20 B: Audio 50 APS* C: COMAND APS* X Refer to the separate operating instructions to find out which audio system is fitted in your vehicle. Depending on the audio system, the time and date are received from GPS satellites and therefore cannot be set using the on-board computer. See the following table. A B C Set using the on-board computer Automatic GPS satellite reception X X X * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 135 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Time/Date submenu. Setting the time X Use the j button to select Clock, hours Press R to confirm (or Clock, minutes Press R to confirm). X Press the æ or ç button to set a value. X Press the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster. The set time is stored. Setting the date X X X Press the j button to select Set date Day (or Set date Month or Set date Year). Press the æ or ç button to set the values. Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Setting constant headlamp mode If you have set constant headlamp mode and the light switch is in position M or U, the side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps and licence plate lighting are switched on automatically when the engine is running. Turning the light switch to a different position switches on the corresponding lights. Make sure that the light switch is turned to B or U if you switch off constant headlamp mode while driving in the dark. In countries in which constant headlamp mode is a legal requirement, Constant is the factory setting. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select Headlamp mode. X Press the æ or ç button to set the mode for the headlamps to Manual or Constant (constant headlamp mode). X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Switching the surround lighting on or off If the surround lighting is switched on, the following lights will be switched on automatically in the dark after you have unlocked the vehicle using the key: Rthe side lamps Rthe tail lamps Rthe licence plate lighting Rthe front foglamps The surround lighting switches off automatically if you open the driver's door or after 40 seconds. X Press è or · to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. 135 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 136 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer X Press the j button to select the Surround lighting function. Activating/deactivating the exterior lighting delayed switch-off X Press the æ or ç button to switch the Surround lighting function on or off. You can set whether the exterior lighting should remain on for 15 seconds after the doors are closed when it is dark using the Headlamps delayed switch-off function. If none of the doors are opened after the engine is switched off or if an open door is not closed, the exterior lighting goes out after 60 seconds. When you have set a delayed switch-off time and then switch off the engine, the following remain lit: X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Setting the ambient lighting* X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. Rthe side lamps Rthe tail lamps Rthe licence plate lighting Rthe front foglamps X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select Ambient light. X X Press the æ or ç button to adjust the brightness to any level from 0 (off) to 5 (bright). Press è or · to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select Headlamps delayed switch-off. X 136 X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate the Headlamps delayed switch-off feature. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. To temporarily deactivate the delayed switchoff: X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and back to position 0. Delayed switch-off is deactivated. It is reactivated as soon as you start the engine again. Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off The Interior lighting delayed switchoff function allows you to set whether the interior lighting should remain on for 10 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition lock when it is dark. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 137 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the æ or ç button to switch the Intelligent Light System on/off. X Press the j button to select Interior lighting delayed switch-off. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate the Interior lighting delayed switch-off feature. Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Switching the Intelligent Light System* on/off You can set whether motorway mode, the active light system and the extended range foglamps are to be activated using the Intelligent Light System function. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Lighting submenu. X Press the j button to select Intelligent Light System. * optional Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking feature The Automatic door locking feature allows you to set whether your vehicle will lock centrally from a speed of about 15 km/h upwards. i For more information on the automatic locking feature, see (Y page 70). X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press the j button to select Automatic door locking. X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate the Automatic door locking feature. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Selecting the switch-on time for the auxiliary heating* This function is only available if the vehicle has an auxiliary heating system. The Auxiliary heat. function allows you to select three switch-on times. You can set the exact switch-on time using the other functions in the Heater submenu. The auxiliary heating adopts the Thermatic or 4-zone Thermotronic* temperature setting. The minimum and maximum temperature settings for the auxiliary heating are 20 † and 24 † respectively. You can switch off the auxiliary heating by using the remote control or the auxiliary heating button on the centre console. The auxiliary heating is switched off automatically after 50 minutes. This time can be changed. To do this, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 137 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 138 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer G Risk of fire and poisoning The operation of the auxiliary heating produces hot, toxic exhaust fumes. The fuel vapours produced during refuelling could ignite on the hot exhaust system. Do not switch on the auxiliary heating at filling stations or in enclosed spaces, for instance, a garage, if there is no air extraction system. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The Auxiliary heat. function can be called up directly. X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the button for the auxiliary heating on the centre console (Y page 178). or X X Press the æ or ç button to select one of the three switch-on times or Timer off (auxiliary heating switched off). When a switch-on time is selected, the yellow indicator lamp lights up in the auxiliary heating button. Changing the switch-on time for the auxiliary heating* This function is only displayed if you have selected a switch-on time. Here you can enter the time at which the auxiliary heating is to be switched on. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. Press the æ or ç button to select the Heater submenu. X X Press the æ or ç button to select the Heater submenu. Press the j button to select Switch-on time X Set hours. X X Press the j button to select Auxiliary heat.. Press the æ or ç button to set the hour. 138 Press the j button to select Switch-on time X Set minutes. X Press the æ or ç button to set the minutes. After changing from one menu to another, the new time setting is stored. The yellow indicator lamp lights up on the button for the auxiliary heating on the centre console. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. X X X Activating/deactivating the easyentry/exit feature* i For more information on the easy-entry/ exit feature, see (Y page 90). G Risk of injury When the easy-entry/exit feature is active, the steering wheel moves. There is a risk of occupants becoming trapped. Before activating the easy-entry/exit feature, make sure that nobody can become trapped. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could open the driver's door and thereby unintention- * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 139 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer ally activate the easy-entry/exit feature and become trapped. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the j button to select the EASYENTRY system. X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate the EASY-ENTRY system. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Activating/deactivating the Fold in mirrors when locking* function The Fold in mirrors when locking function allows you to determine whether the exterior mirrors should fold in when you lock the vehicle. When you switch on the ignition, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched the function on and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 92), they will not fold out * optional automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press the j button to select Fold in mirrors when locking. X Press the æ or ç button to activate or deactivate the Fold in mirrors when locking feature. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Selecting a setting for the dynamic driving seat* i For more information on the dynamic driving seat, see (Y page 84). X Press the è or · button to select the Settings... menu. X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Driving dynamics seat adjustment submenu. X Press the j button to select Driving dyn. seat adjust., driver or Driving dyn. seat adjust., front-pass.. X Press the æ or ç button to select the desired seat setting: Gentle for a soft seat setting or Vigorous for a hard seat setting. X Press the j, è or ÿ button to select a different display. Trip computer menu You can use the Trip computer menu to call up or reset statistical data for your vehicle. i You can select km or miles as the unit of measurement for distance (Y page 133). i Menu overview: see (Y page 124). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. Consumption statistics from start The values refer to the start of the journey. 139 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 140 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer X Press the è or · button to select From start. X Press the è or · button to select From start. X Press the j or k button to select From reset. 1 Kilometres 2 Time 3 Average speed 4 Average fuel consumption 1 Kilometres 2 Time If the vehicle is parked for more than 4 hours, the From start consumption statistics are reset (key in position 0 of the ignition lock or removed). The values will not be reset if you turn the key to position 1 or 2 during this time. 3 Average speed 4 Average fuel consumption X Press the è or · button to select From start. Consumption statistics from the last reset X Press the j or k button to select the function that you wish to reset. The values refer to the last reset of the function. X Press and hold the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster until the values are reset to "0". 140 Resetting the consumption statistics The From reset consumption statistics are reset automatically after 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilometres. Calling up the range X Press the è or · button to select From start. X Press the j or k button to select Distance:. The multi-function display shows the estimated distance that can be covered by the vehicle, based on your current driving style and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refuelled ¿ appears in the display instead of the range. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 141 Version: 2.9.4 Controls On-board computer Telephone menu* Functions and displays are dependent on the optional equipment installed in your vehicle. You can place your mobile phone in the mobile phone bracket* (Y page 211), or set up a Bluetooth connection to the audio system or COMAND APS* (see the separate operating instructions). G Risk of accident Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding the use of mobile phones in the vehicle. If it is permitted to use mobile phones while the vehicle is in motion, you should only use them when the road and traffic conditions allow. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. i Menu overview: (Y page 124). Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X X Switch on the mobile phone and audio system or COMAND APS*; see the separate operating instructions. Press the è or · button to select the Telephone menu. Accepting a call If someone calls you while you are in the Telephone menu, the following message appears in the multi-function display: Mobile phone on PIN code not yet entered Once you have inserted the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket*, the following message appears in the multi-function display Please enter PIN. X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, Linguatronic*, the audio systemor COMAND APS*. The mobile phone will search for a network. Mobile phone operational The multi-function display shows Ready or the name of the GSM network provider. If the operational readiness symbol goes out, your vehicle is outside the transmission and reception range. In this case, No Service appears in the multi-function display. X Press the s button to accept the call. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the t button. Dialling a number from the phone book If your mobile phone is operational, you can select and dial a number from the phone book at any time. It is only possible to enter new numbers into the phone book using the mobile phone. Please refer to the separate operating instructions for notes on how to do this. Z * optional 141 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 142 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems X Press the è or · button to select the Telephone menu. X Press the è or · button to select the Telephone menu. X Press the j or k button to call up the phone book. X X Press the j or k button to select the desired name. To scroll through the telephone book faster, press and hold the j or k button for longer than 1 second. Press the s button to call up the most recently dialled number in the redial memory. X Press the j or k button to select the desired name or number. X Press the s button to start dialling. X Press the s button to start dialling. The multi-function display shows the Connecting call...message. The number dialled is stored in the redial memory. When there is a connection, the name of the person called – if stored in the phone book – or the number dialled appears in the multi-function display. or X If you do not wish to make a call, press the t button. Driving systems Overview of driving systems The vehicle's driving systems are described on the following pages: RCruise control, Distronic* and Speedtronic, which are used to control the speed of the vehicle RHOLD, which makes pulling away easier, particularly on steep uphill gradients RVehicle level setting and AIRMATIC DC*, which are used to adjust the vehicle's suspension system R4*MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive), for optimum traction RParktronic*, which assists you in parking and manoeuvring The ABS, BAS, adaptive brake lights, ESP®, EBV (electronic brake-power distribution) and ADAPTIVE BRAKE driving safety systems are described in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 58). Redialling The on-board computer stores the last phone numbers which were dialled. 142 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 143 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems Cruise control Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in good time or select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in vehicles with automatic transmission*. By doing so you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 30 km/h. G Risk of accident Cruise control cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when cruise control is activated. * optional Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. G Risk of accident Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g. heavy traffic or winding roads). You could otherwise cause an accident. Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow 1 Segments Cruise control lever You can operate cruise control and variable Speedtronic with the cruise control lever. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: Cruise control display in the speedometer RLIM When cruise control is activated, the segments from the set speed to the maximum speed light up in the multi-function display. RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is selected indicator lamp lit: variable Speedtronic is selected Z 143 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 144 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 30 km/h and ESP® is activated (Y page 60). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. 1 To store the current speed or a higher speed 2 LIM indicator lamp 3 To select the current or last stored speed 4 To store the current speed or a lower speed 5 To switch between cruise control and variable Speedtronic 6 Deactivating cruise control Selecting cruise control X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is off. If it is off, cruise control is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected. 144 X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 or down 4. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. Selecting the current or last stored speed G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current situation. Otherwise, sudden acceleration or braking could endanger you or others. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Vehicles with manual transmission: RAlways drive at adequate, but not excessive, engine speeds. RChange RIf gear in good time. possible, do not change down several gears at a time. Setting a speed X Press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 145 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. i Deceleration of the vehicle by means of the cruise control lever is assisted by automatic application of the brakes. Vehicles with automatic transmission*: On long downhill gradients, the automatic transmission shifts down as a further measure. Making fine adjustments in 1 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: * optional X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards 6. or X Brake. or X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever lights up. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if, for example: Ryou depress the parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h RESP® ESP® is intervening or you deactivate Ryou move the selector lever to N in vehicles with automatic transmission* while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise control off message in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds. Distronic* Distronic regulates the speed and automatically maintains the distance to the vehicle in front. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3. By doing so,you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G Risk of accident Distronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. The driver remains fully responsible for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and braking in good time. i The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. Z 145 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 146 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems Distronic does not react to: Rpedestrians Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. sta- tionary or parked vehicles Roncoming and crossing traffic Distronic may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. Therefore, always pay attention to traffic conditions even when Distronic is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, Distronic causes your vehicle to brake and maintain a preset distance to the vehicle in front. G Risk of accident Distronic cannot take account of road and traffic conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate, Distronic if it does not detect the vehicle in front, or if it no longer detects it. This is especially the case: Rbefore Ron 146 corners filter lanes Rwhen changing to a lane with faster mov- ing traffic Rin complex driving situations or where the lanes are diverted, e.g. at motorway/ roadway construction sites Otherwise, Distronic maintains the current speed or accelerates to the set speed. Distronic cannot take account of weather conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate, Distronic: Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or icy. The wheels could lose their grip under braking or acceleration. The vehicle could start to skid. Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Distance control may be impaired. Always pay attention to traffic conditions even when Distronic is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to recognise dangers in time, could cause an accident and injure yourself and others. If there is no vehicle in front, Distronic operates in the same way as cruise control. Distronic functions in the 30 km/h to 180 km/h range. G Risk of accident Distronic brakes your vehicle at a maximum of 2 m/s2, depending on its speed. This corresponds to approximately 20% of your vehicle's maximum braking power. You must also apply the brakes yourself if this braking power is not sufficient. If Distronic detects a risk of collision with a vehicle in front, an intermittent warning tone sounds. In addition, the l distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Brake to avoid a collision. Cruise control lever With the cruise control lever you can operate Distronic and variable Speedtronic. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: Distronic is selected RLIM indicator lamp lit: variable Speedtronic is selected Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 147 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems Switching on Distronic, storing the current speed and maintaining it i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC override message appears in the multi-function display. The distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be adjusted. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. If Distronic is not activated after the cruise control lever is pressed, you will see the message - - - in the multi-function display. You cannot activate Distronic in the following circumstances: Rif you are driving slower than 30 km/h or faster than 180 km/h 1 To store the current speed or a higher Rwhen braking 2 LIM indicator lamp 3 To select the current or last stored speed Rwhen you have applied the parking brake Rif speed 4 To store the current speed or a lower speed 5 To switch between Distronic and variable Speedtronic 6 To deactivate Distronic Selecting Distronic X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is off. If it is off, Distronic is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever goes out. Distronic is selected. * optional ESP® is deactivated Rwhen the selector lever* is in position P, R or N Rfor two minutes after the engine is started X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 or down 4. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Distronic is activated. The vehicle maintains the stored speed until the distance to the vehicle in front becomes too small. Setting a speed X Press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached. X Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored. i Deceleration of the vehicle by means of the cruise control lever is assisted by automatic application of the brakes. On long downhill gradients, the automatic transmission* shifts down as a further measure. Z 147 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 148 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems Adjustment in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced. Making fine adjustments in 1 km/h increments X For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. or X Keep the cruise control lever pulled towards you 3 until the desired speed is reached. Selecting the current or last stored speed G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current situation. Otherwise, sudden acceleration or braking could endanger you or others. 148 X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Distronic is activated and accepts the current speed if it is activated for the first time, or adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored. Setting the specified minimum distance for Distronic You can set the specified minimum distance for Distronic by varying the time span between one and two seconds. This time span determines the distance that Distronic should maintain from the vehicle in front, depending on the road speed. You can read this distance in the multi-function display (Y page 149). 1 To activate/deactivate the distance warn- ing function 2 Indicator lamp 3 To adjust the set distance Adjusting the set distance X To increase: turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯. Distronic then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn thumbwheel 3 towards ®. Distronic then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 149 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems i Make sure that you maintain the mini- mum distance to the vehicle in front required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Brake or take evasive action as necessary. When Distronic is activated, one or two segments in the set speed range light up. i Distronic does not always clearly recog- i For design reasons, the speed displayed nise complex road and traffic conditions. You may then receive a false distance warning tone or none at all. Distance warning function Even if Distronic is deactivated, this function warns you at speeds above 30 km/h if: Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the speed you are driving at for several seconds. The l distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster then lights up. Ryou are approaching a vehicle in front at too great a speed. You then hear an intermittent warning tone, and the l distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for Distronic. To activate/deactivate: press button 1. When the function is activated, indicator lamp 2 in the button lights up and a loudspeaker symbol appears in the display. When the function is deactivated, indicator lamp 2 in the button goes out and the loudspeaker symbol disappears from the multi-function display. Distronic displays in the speedometer 1 Segments If Distronic detects a vehicle in front, the segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. You must apply the brakes yourself in order to maintain the correct distance to the vehicle and to avoid a collision. Distronic menu in the on-board computer G Risk of accident Be especially observant of traffic conditions when the l distance warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up or an intermittent warning tone sounds. 1 Stored speed You can read the current Distronic settings in the Distronic menu. The reading in the multifunction display depends on whether Distronic and the distance warning function are activated or deactivated. 149 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 150 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems X Press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until one of the following two displays appears in the multi-function display. activated, you will see the following in the multi-function display: X Distronic deactivated When Distronic is deactivated you will see the standard Distronic display in the multi-function display. X X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 3. Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever lights up. i You will see the Distronic off message 1 Vehicle in front, if detected 2 Distance indicator, displaying current dis- in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds. The last speed stored is cleared when you switch off the engine. tance to the vehicle in front 3 Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front, adjustable i Distronic is not deactivated if you depress 4 Own vehicle 5 Symbol for activated distance warning 150 Brake. or Deactivating Distronic Distronic activated When Distronic is activated, the stored speed appears in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds. With Distronic Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards 1. or 1 Display for activated Distronic function There are several ways to deactivate Distronic: 1 To deactivate Distronic 2 LIM indicator lamp 3 To switch between Distronic and variable Speedtronic the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate briefly to overtake, Distronic adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Distronic is automatically deactivated if: Ryou depress the parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 30 km/h Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 151 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems RESP® ESP® is intervening or you deactivate Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend Ryou move the selector lever* to N while driving Distronic may not detect vehicles travelling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Other vehicles changing lane If Distronic is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Distronic off message in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds. Tips for driving with Distronic The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, brake if necessary. Distronic is then deactivated. The ability of Distronic to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or belatedly. Vehicles travelling on a different line Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle cutting in. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Z * optional 151 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 152 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems Narrow vehicles Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the carriageway, because of its relatively narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Speedtronic Speedtronic brakes automatically so that you do not exceed the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in good time or select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in vehicles with automatic transmission*. By doing so you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, which relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and 152 wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. vehicle's speed and for braking in good time. G Risk of accident i The speed indicated in the speedometer Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. Variable Speedtronic G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You can set a variable or permanent limit speed: RVariable areas for speed limits, e.g. in built-up RPermanent for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. for driving on winter tyres (Y page 154) may differ slightly from the limit speed stored. With the cruise control lever, you can operate cruise control, Distronic* and variable Speedtronic. The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control lever indicates which system you have selected: RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control or Distronic* is selected RLIM indicator lamp lit: variable Speedtronic is selected You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. G Risk of accident Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 153 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever lights up. Variable Speedtronic is selected. X G Risk of accident 1 To store the current speed or a higher speed 2 LIM indicator lamp 3 To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed or to make fine adjustments in 1 km/h increments 4 To store the current speed or a lower speed 5 To switch between cruise control, Distronic* and variable Speedtronic 6 To deactivate variable Speedtronic Selecting variable Speedtronic X Check whether LIM indicator lamp 2 is on. If it is on, variable Speedtronic is already selected. * optional If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the limit speed stored. Only use Speedtronic if you will not have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above that stored as the limit speed. You could otherwise cause an accident. You can only exceed the limit speed stored if you deactivate variable Speedtronic: Rusing the cruise control lever. Rby depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 or down 4. The current speed is stored. The stored speed, e.g. LIM km/h, appears in the multifunction display. The segments in the speedometer from the start of the scale up to the stored speed light up. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G Risk of accident Only select a stored speed if you know what that speed is and whether it is suitable for the current driving and traffic situation. Otherwise, sudden braking could endanger you or others. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. Storing the current speed You can use the cruise control lever to limit the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while the engine is running. Z 153 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 154 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems Making adjustments in 10 km/h increments X Briefly press the cruise control lever up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. or X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is set. Press the cruise control lever, up 1 for a higher speed or down 4 for a lower speed. Making fine adjustments in 1 km/h increments X For a higher speed: briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you 3. Keep the cruise control lever pulled towards you 3 until the desired speed is set. Deactivating variable Speedtronic There are several ways to deactivate variable Speedtronic: X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 5. LIM indicator lamp 2 in the cruise control lever goes out. Variable Speedtronic is deactivated. Cruise control or Distronic* is selected. Variable Speedtronic is deactivated automatically when you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown) but only if your current speed does not differ by more than 20 km/h from the stored speed. You will hear a warning tone if this is the case. Shortly before the stored speed is reached it is shown in the multi-function display. You cannot exceed the stored limit speed, even if you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). Setting permanent Speedtronic X Press è or · to select the Settings... menu (Y page 131). X Press the j button to call up the selection of submenus. X Press the æ or ç button to select the Vehicle submenu. X Press j to select Speed limit (winter tyres). X Press the æ or ç button to select the desired setting. The following settings can be selected: ROff G Risk of accident It is not possible to deactivate variable Speedtronic by braking. i The last speed stored is cleared when you or X X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards 6. switch off the engine. Permanent Speedtronic i Permanent Speedtronic is only available for certain countries. You can use the on-board computer to limit the speed permanently to a value between 160 km/h (e.g. for driving with winter tyres) and the maximum speed. or 154 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 155 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems Permanent Speedtronic is deactivated. RA limit speed between 240 km/h and 160 km/h in increments of 10 km/h. X To select a different display, press the j, è or ÿ button. HOLD HOLD relieves the strain on the driver: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen manoeuvring on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is cancelled and HOLD deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Activation conditions You can activate HOLD if: Rthe vehicle is stationary Rthe engine is running Rthe driver's door is closed Rthe parking brake is not applied * optional Rthe bonnet is closed Ron vehicles with automatic transmission*, the selector lever is in position D, R or N Activating HOLD Deactivating HOLD HOLD is deactivated if: Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic transmission*, only if the selector lever is in position D or R. X Make sure that the activation conditions are met. Rthe selector lever is moved to P on vehicles X Depress the brake. Ryou X Depress the brake again quickly until HOLD appears in the display. HOLD is activated. You can release the brake pedal. i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate HOLD, wait briefly and then try again. G Risk of accident The vehicle's brakes are applied when HOLD is activated. For this reason, deactivate HOLD if the vehicle is to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing). with automatic transmission* release the brakes completely and apply them again with a certain amount of pressure until the HOLD message in the multi-function display goes out G Risk of accident Never get out of the vehicle when HOLD is activated. HOLD must never be operated or deactivated by a passenger or from outside the vehicle. HOLD does not replace the parking brake and must not be used for parking. The HOLD braking effect is cancelled and the vehicle can start moving if: Z 155 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 156 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems RHOLD is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an interruption in the power supply, e.g. battery failure Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses are tampered with Rthe battery is disconnected G Risk of accident If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate HOLD and secure the vehicle against rolling away. You will see a warning message in the multifunction display if HOLD is activated and: Rthe driver's door is opened and you release the seat belt Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe bonnet is opened Vehicles with manual transmission: Brake immediately X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message in the multifunction display goes out. This deactivates HOLD. 156 Vehicles with automatic transmission*: Selector lever in park position X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. HOLD is deactivated. The warning message in the multi-function display goes out. A horn will also sound at regular intervals if HOLD is activated and you: Rstop the engine and open the driver's door Ropen the bonnet The horn draws your attention to the fact that the vehicle has been parked while HOLD is still activated. The sound becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until HOLD is deactivated. i If the ignition has been switched off, the engine cannot be restarted until HOLD is deactivated. If there is a fault in the system or power supply while HOLD is activated, the Brake immediately message appears in the multi-function display. Immediately depress the brake firmly until the warning message disappears from the multi-function display, or in vehicles with automatic transmission*, move the selector lever to P. This deactivates HOLD. AIRMATIC DC* Vehicle level Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride height to reduce petrol consumption and improve driving safety. The following vehicle levels are possible: RNormal RRaised RLowered The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be set manually. The "Lowered" vehicle level is set automatically: Rat speeds above 140 km/h Rif you have selected "Sports tuning I or II" (Y page 157) Setting the vehicle level manually Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel housing or under the vehicle * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 157 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems while lowering the vehicle when it is stationary. Otherwise, limbs could become trapped. Setting the normal level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp 2 is lit: X Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the normal level. i The "Raised Level" setting is cancelled, if: The damping/spring stiffness settings are dependent on: Ryour Rthe driving style road surface conditions Ryour individual selection Your selection remains stored even if you remove the key from the ignition lock. Ryou drive at a speed of more than 120 km/h Ryou drive at a speed between 80 km/h and 120 km/h for five minutes or more 1 To set the vehicle level 2 Indicator lamp Setting the raised level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp 2 is not lit: X Press button 1. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle is adjusted to the raised level. The Vehicle rising message appears in the multi-function display If you do not drive at such speeds, the raised level remains stored, even when the key is removed from the ignition lock. Comfort or sports tuning AIRMATIC DC (dual control) is comprised of two components: the Adaptive Damping System (ADS) and spring stiffness adjustment. ADS automatically regulates the suspension as appropriate to particular driving conditions. Parallel to this, the spring stiffness switches between "comfort" and "sports" levels. 1 To select the damping program 2 Indicator lamps X Start the engine. Sports tuning I X Press button 1 once. One indicator lamp 2 lights up. The vehicle level is lowered by 10 mm. 157 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 158 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems Sports tuning II X Press button 1 twice. Two indicator lamps 2 light up. The vehicle level is lowered by 15 mm. Comfort tuning X Press button 1 repeatedly until indicator lamps 2 go out. Multi-function display A message appears in the multi-function display for approximately five seconds once you have selected a damping program, for example: 4MATIC* (permanent four-wheel drive) 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. G Risk of accident 4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an accident if you drive too fast. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. RAccelerate less when driving. RAdapt your driving style to suit road and traffic conditions. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary. 158 Parktronic* G Risk of accident Parktronic is only an aid and may not detect all obstacles. It is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your immediate surroundings when parking and manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they could be injured. Parktronic is an electronic parking aid. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. Parktronic is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition and release the parking brake. Parktronic is deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds. Parktronic monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 159 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems Front sensors Centre Approximately 100 cm Corners Approximately 60 cm Rear sensors 1 Sensors in the front bumper Side view: Saloon shown as an example Centre Approximately 120 cm Corners Approximately 80 cm ! Pay particular attention to objects above Range of the sensors or below the sensors when parking, such as flower pots or trailer towbars. Parktronic does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill could cause Parktronic to malfunction. The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush, otherwise they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. Top view: Saloon shown as an example Minimum distance Centre Approximately 20 cm Corners Approximately 15 cm Z 159 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 160 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems If there is an obstacle within this range, all warning displays light up and a tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum clearance, it may no longer be shown. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. Parktronic is operational if yellow indicator segments 3 light up. Warning displays The gear lever or selector lever position* determines which warning display is active: Manual transmission: The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the centre air vents. The warning display for the rear area is in the roof trim at the rear. Gear lever in Warning display Forwards gear or Neutral Front area activated Reverse gear Rear and front areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. You have reached the minimum distance. Deactivating/activating Parktronic Automatic transmission*: Front area warning display 1 Left-hand side of the vehicle 2 Right-hand side of the vehicle 3 Indicator segments 160 Selector lever at Warning display D Front area activated R or N Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated 1 To deactivate/activate Parktronic 2 Indicator lamp If indicator lamp 2 is on, Parktronic is deactivated. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 161 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Driving systems i Parktronic is automatically activated when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Trailer towing* Parktronic is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and the trailer. ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. Parktronic measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. Z * optional 161 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 162 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning Air conditioning Overview of air-conditioning systems The vehicle is equipped with one of the following air-conditioning systems: 2-zone Thermatic 4-zone Thermotronic* 2-zone Thermatic is an automatic air-conditioning system combining an automatic heating and ventilation system with a cooling system. 4-zone Thermotronic is a luxury automatic The rear-compartment air conditioning air-conditioning system combining an auto- allows a separate temperature setting for the matic heating and ventilation system with a rear compartment. cooling system. You can control the air conditioning separately for each zone in the vehicle. 24 Rear-compartment 162 Rear-compartment air conditioning*24 air conditioning is only available in conjunction with 4-zone Thermotronic. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 163 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning General notes 2-zone Thermatic controls the temperature of the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable substances from the air. 4-zone Thermotronic* controls the temperature and the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters out undesirable substances from the air. 2-zone Thermatic/4-zone Thermotronic* is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved when you drive with the side windows and sliding/ tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sunroof* closed. i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the summer opening feature (Y page 109). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most par- ticles of dust and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Service Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Service Booklet. G Risk of accident Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. This may obstruct your view of the traffic situation, thereby causing an accident. Z * optional 163 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 164 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning Overview of air-conditioning system functions 2-zone Thermatic Function Recommendation/Notes 1 Sets the temperature, left i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 170) 2 y Demists the windscreen i Only use the "demisting" function until the wind- (Y page 174) 3 Q Increases the airflow 164 screen is clear again. (Y page 174) Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 165 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning Function Recommendation/Notes 4 Display 5 © Sets the air distribution 6 ¯ Switches the rear window heating on/off i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating is (Y page 175) 7 Sets the temperature, right i Set the temperature to 22 †. 8 T Switches the residual heat function on/off i You can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate the (Y page 176) 9 2 Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification i Switch on the air conditioning with air-dehumidifica- (Y page 169) a ª Sets the air distribution b ´ Activates/deactivates Thermatic c · Reduces the airflow (Y page 173) only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed up. (Y page 170) vehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition. tion function. The indicator lamp in the 2 button comes on. (Y page 173) i Activate Thermatic. The display comes on. (Y page 169) (Y page 174) Z 165 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 166 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning Function Recommendation/Notes d , Activates/deactivates Thermatic i Only use this operating mode for a short time, e.g. in (Y page 175) e U Controls the air conditioning automatically i Activate automatic air conditioning. AUTO appears in (Y page 170) a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can mist up due to lack of fresh air. the display. 4-zone Thermotronic* 166 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 167 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning Function Recommendation/Notes 1 Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 173) 2 y Demists the windscreen i Only use the "demisting" function until the wind- (Y page 174) 3 $ Increases the temperature, left i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 170) 4 Display 5 $ Increases the temperature, right i Set the temperature to 22 †. (Y page 170) 6 ¯ Switches the rear window heating on/off i At very low temperatures, the rear window heating is (Y page 175) 7 Sets the air distribution, right 8 U Controls the air conditioning automatically, right i Activate the automatic air conditioning. The indicator (Y page 170) 9 2 Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification i Switch on the air conditioning with air-dehumidifica- (Y page 169) a % Reduces the temperature, right i Set the temperature to 22 †. screen is clear again. only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed up. (Y page 173) lamp in the U button comes on. tion function. The indicator lamp in the 2 button comes on. (Y page 170) Z 167 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 168 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning Function Recommendation/Notes b ™ Operates the rear-compartment air conditioning via 4-zone Thermotronic (Y page 171) c Q Increases the airflow (Y page 174) d ´ Activates/deactivates 4-zone Thermotronic e · Reduces the airflow f T Switches the residual heat function on/off i You can use the residual heat to heat or ventilate the (Y page 176) g % Reduces the temperature, left i Set the temperature to 22 †. h , Activates/deactivates Thermatic i Only use this operating mode for a short time, e.g. in (Y page 175) j U Controls the air conditioning automatically, left i Activate the automatic air conditioning. The indicator (Y page 170) 168 i Activate 4-zone Thermotronic. The display comes on. (Y page 169) (Y page 174) vehicle interior after you have switched off the ignition. (Y page 170) a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows can mist up due to lack of fresh air. lamp in the U button comes on. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 169 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning Rear-compartment air conditioning* Switching the air conditioning on/off i When the air conditioning is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. Only select this setting briefly, otherwise the windows may mist up. i Switch the air conditioning on preferably using the U button. 1 $ Increases the temperature, left 2 Display 3 $ Increases the temperature, right 4 % Reduces the temperature, right 5 % Reduces the temperature, left X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the ´ button. The display comes on. The previously selected settings come into effect again. X To deactivate: press the ´ button. The display shows 025/OFF26. i You can also press another button (apart from the ¯ and T buttons) to activate Thermatic. Switching cooling with air-dehumidification on/off The "cooling with dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. This prevents the windows from misting up. G Risk of accident If the "cooling with air dehumidification" function is deactivated, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled (during warm weather) or dehumidified. The windows could mist up more quickly. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. H Environmental note The cooling system uses the refrigerant R134A. This refrigerant does not damage the earth's ozone layer. i Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when Thermatic is in cooling mode. 25 Vehicles 26 Vehicles Z with 2-zone Thermatic. with 4-zone Thermotronic*. * optional 169 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 170 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning X X To switch on: press the œ button. The indicator lamp in the œ button comes on. To deactivate: press the œ button. The indicator lamp in the œ button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. i The cooling with air dehumidification function in the rear compartment is only operative if the 4-zone Thermotronic cooling with air dehumidification function* is switched on. Controlling the air conditioning automatically In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained at a constant level fully automatically. To do so, the system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic air conditioning will achieve optimal operation if "cooling with air dehumidification" is also activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. 27 Vehicles 170 X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the U button. The AUTO display for the air distribution and airflow comes on. The indicator lamp27 on the U button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. X To deactivate: press the Q or · button. The AUTO display for the airflow goes out. The automatic control is deactivated and the airflow is controlled according to the selected setting. Automatic air distribution remains activated. or X 4-zone Thermotronic only*: turn air distribution thumbwheel 1 or 7 to the desired symbol (Y page 166). The indicator lamp in the U button goes out. The automatic control is deactivated and the air distribution is controlled according to the selected setting. Automatic airflow remains activated. Setting the temperature 2-zone Thermatic: the temperature for the driver's and front-passenger side can be set individually. or X 2-zone Thermatic only: press the © or ª air distribution button. The AUTO display for the air distribution goes out. The automatic control is deactivated and the air distribution is controlled according to the selected setting. Automatic airflow remains activated. Air-conditioning zones for 4-zone Thermotronic* with 4-zone Thermotronic*. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 171 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning 4-zone Thermotronic*: the temperature for each of the four air-conditioning zones can be set individually. You can set the temperature separately for the driver's and frontpassenger sides as well as for the left and right sides of the rear compartment. Setting the temperature in the rear compartment via 4-zone Thermotronic* X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ™ button. X To increase/reduce: press the $ or % button. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. Setting the temperature in the front compartment using 2-zone Thermatic X X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. To increase/reduce: turn thumbwheels 1 and 7 clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 164). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. Setting the temperature in the front compartment via 4-zone Thermotronic* X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the $ or % button. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. The set temperature is shown in the 4-zone Thermotronic* display. * optional Setting the rear-compartment temperature via the rear-compartment air conditioning* The 4-zone Thermotronic* display switches to the rear-compartment air-conditioning settings. X To increase/reduce: press the $ or % button. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. The set temperature is shown in the 4-zone Thermotronic* display. The 4-zone Thermotronic* display changes back to the standard display about five seconds after a button is pressed. i You can also return to the standard display by pressing the ™ button again. Adjusting the air vents G Risk of injury Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the vents. Keep bare skin away from these air outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away to a different area of the vehicle interior. Please observe the following notes to ensure that the air can flow freely through the air vents: RKeep the air inlet between the windscreen and the bonnet free of deposits, such as ice Z 171 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 172 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning and snow, to guarantee the supply of fresh air into the vehicle interior. X To open/close: turn thumbwheels 3 and 4 up or down. Setting the rear-compartment air vents RNever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet grilles in the vehicle interior. Adjusting the side air vents i Position the sliders for the centre air vents in the central position to provide virtually draught-free ventilation. Setting the centre air vents Rear-compartment air conditioning 1 Rear-compartment air vent, left Side air vents 1 Side window demister vent 2 Side air vent 3 Side air vent thumbwheel X Centre air vents 1 Centre air vent, left 2 Centre air vent, right 3 Thumbwheel for centre air vent, right To open/close: turn thumbwheel 3 up or down. i Demister vent 1 is never shut com- 2 Rear-compartment air vent, right 3 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment air vent, right 4 Control panel for rear-compartment air conditioning*28 5 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment air vent, left X To open/close: turn thumbwheels 3 and 5 up or down. pletely, even if side air vent 2 is shut. 4 Thumbwheel for centre air vent, left 28 Rear-compartment 172 air conditioning* available only in conjunction with 4-zone Thermotronic*. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 173 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning Setting the rear-compartment side air vents* Setting the air distribution 2-zone Thermatic The symbols for the air distribution have the following meanings: Rear-compartment side air vents 1 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment side air vent 2 Rear-compartment side air vent X To open/close: turn thumbwheel 1 to the left or right. Symbol Meaning b Directs the airflow to the entire vehicle interior c Directs the airflow through the demister, the centre and the side air vents Z Directs the airflow through the demister vents X Directs the airflow through the demister and footwell vents in the front and rear a Symbol Meaning Y Directs the airflow through the footwell vents in the front and rear Ú Directs the airflow through the centre, the side and the footwell vents in the front and rear X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the © or ª button repeatedly until the 2-zone Thermatic display shows the desired symbol. 4-zone Thermotronic* The air distribution can be adjusted individually for the driver's and front-passenger sides. Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents Z * optional 173 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 174 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning The symbols for the air distribution have the following meanings: Symbol Meaning Z Directs the airflow through the centre, the side and the demister air vents a Directs the airflow through the centre and side air vents X Directs the airflow to the entire vehicle interior Y Directs the airflow through the centre, the side and the footwell vents in the front and rear X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Turn thumbwheel 1 or 7 to the corresponding symbol (Y page 166). The thumbwheel can also be turned to the area between two symbols. Setting the airflow X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To increase/reduce: press the Q or · button. 174 on the outside temperature. To deactivate: press the y button. The indicator lamp in the y button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. The cooling with air dehumidification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or Demisting the windscreen X i You should only select the "demisting" function until the windscreen is clear again. X X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. To activate: press the y button. The indicator lamp in the y button comes on. The system automatically switches to the following functions: Rcooling with air dehumidification on Rhigh airflow29 Rhigh temperature29 Rair distribution to the windscreen and front side windows Rair-recirculation 29 Depending X mode off Press the U button. The indicator lamp in the y button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. or X 2-zone Thermatic: turn thumbwheels 1 or 7 clockwise or anti-clockwise (Y page 164). or X 2-zone Thermatic: press the Q or · button. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 175 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning Demisting the windows Windows misted up on the inside X Activate the "cooling function with airdehumidification" function. X Activate the automatic mode. X If the windows continue to mist up, activate the "demisting" function. Windows misted up on the outside X Activate the windscreen wipers. X 2-zone Thermatic: press and hold the © or ª button until the a, Ú or Y symbol is shown in the display. Switching the rear window heating on/off G Risk of accident Clear all windows of ice or snow before setting off. Impaired visibility could otherwise endanger you and others. i At very low temperatures, the rear win- dow heating is only switched on once the vehicle interior has warmed up. i The rear window heating has a high cur- rent draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the window is clear, as it only switches off automatically after approximately six to twenty minutes. 4-zone Thermotronic*: turn the thumbwheel for air distribution to the Y or a symbol. i If the battery voltage is too low, the rear i You should only select this setting until area of the rear window; this area is therefore not heated. X window heating may switch off. i Saloon: there are aerial wires in the upper the windscreen is clear again. * optional X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the ¯ button. The indicator lamp in the ¯ button lights up or goes out. Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. G Risk of accident Only switch over to air-recirculation mode briefly at low outside temperatures. Otherwise, the windows could mist up, thus impairing visibility and endangering yourself and others. This may prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To activate: press the , button. The indicator lamp in the , button comes on. i Air-recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the , button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. 175 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 176 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning X To deactivate: press the , button. The indicator lamp in the , button goes out. i Air-recirculation mode switches off automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 5† Rafter approximately five minutes if the air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 5† moves. If there is a risk of entrapment, press the , button again. If necessary, press the switch that stops, opens or closes the side window in the opposite direction. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you open or close the sliding/ tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sunroof*. If there is a risk of entrapment, press the , button again. If necessary, press the switch that stops, opens or closes the sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sunroof* in the opposite direction. X Air-recirculation mode with the convenience opening/closing feature G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side windows are opened and closed. Do not place objects or lean against the side window when it is being opened or closed. You or the objects could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the window 176 X Convenience closing: press and hold the , button until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sunroof* have closed. The indicator lamp in the , button comes on. Air-recirculation mode is activated. Convenience opening: press and hold the , button until the side windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof*/panorama sliding sunroof* have reached their original position. The indicator lamp in the , button goes out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. i If you open the side windows or the slid- ing/tilting sunroof* or panorama sliding sunroof* manually after closing using the convenience closing feature, it will remain in this position when opened using the convenience opening feature. Switching the residual heat on and off It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the set interior temperature. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i If you activate the "residual heat" function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X Make sure that the key is in position 0 in the ignition lock or that it has been removed. X To switch on: press the T button. REST appears in the display. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 177 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning To deactivate: press the T button. REST is no longer shown in the display. must therefore switch off the auxiliary heating at filling stations. i The residual heat automatically switches Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxiliary heating is in operation. Inhaling these exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in confined spaces without an extraction system, e.g. a garage. The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehicle interior to a temperature between 20 † and 24 †, without depending on heat emitted by the running engine. The auxiliary heating is operated using fuel directly from the vehicle's fuel tank. For this reason, the tank content must be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that the auxiliary heating functions. The auxiliary heating/ventilation automatically adjusts to changes in temperature and weather conditions. For this reason, the auxiliary heating could switch from ventilation mode to heating mode or from heating mode to ventilation mode. You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to cool the vehicle interior to a temperature lower than the outside temperature. G Risk of fire Before activating X off after around 30 minutes or if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe battery voltage drops Switching auxiliary heating/ventilation* on/off G Risk of poisoning When operating the auxiliary heating, parts of the vehicle may become very hot, and highly inflammable material such as fuels could be ignited. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus prohibited at filling stations or when your vehicle is being refuelled. You * optional X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the temperature to a value between 20 † and 24 †. controlled manually. Optimum comfort can be attained when the system is set to automatic mode. Set the desired temperature within this range. If a higher temperature is set, the vehicle is heated to 24 †. If a lower temperature is set, the vehicle is heated to 20 †. Activating/deactivating the auxiliary heating/ventilation The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated or deactivated using the remote control or the button on the centre console. The on-board computer can be used to specify up to three departure times, one of which may be preselected (Y page 138). The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be activated even when the air conditioning is being Z 177 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 178 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning Button on the centre console The indicator lamps in the button may light up in blue, red or yellow. RBlue: RRed: auxiliary ventilation activated auxiliary heating activated RYellow: Centre console (manual transmission) 1 Auxiliary heating/ventilation departure time preselected Activating the auxiliary heating/ventilation If the key is in position 1 or 2: X Press and hold button 1 for at least two seconds. The red or blue indicator lamp in button 1 lights up. If the key is removed or in position 0: X Briefly press button 1. The red or blue indicator lamp in button 1 lights up. Centre console (automatic transmission*) 1 Auxiliary heating/ventilation 178 Deactivating the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Briefly press button 1. The red or blue indicator lamp in button 1 goes out. Remote control Your vehicle comes with one remote control. You may use two additional remote controls for your vehicle. For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The remote control has a maximum range of approximately 300 metres. This range may be reduced by: Rsources of radio interference Rsolid objects between the remote control and the vehicle Rthe remote control being in an unfavourable position in relation to the vehicle Rtransmitting from an enclosed space i The optimum range can be achieved if you hold the remote control vertically, pointing upwards when you press one of the buttons. i A battery symbol appears in the display when the batteries in the remote control are low. Replace the remote control batteries (Y page 311). * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 179 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Air conditioning i More information about the auxiliary heating can be found in the "Practical advice" section (Y page 304). Activating the auxiliary heating/ventilation X Press the ON button. The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. The following messages can appear in the display: Display The heating system has a fault or there is insufficient fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating is not working. The auxiliary ventilation is still functioning. Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is activated. Auxiliary heating remote control 1 Display 2 To check the status 3 OFF – to deactivate auxiliary heating/ ventilation 4 ON – to activate auxiliary heating/ventilation 5 To check the status A malfunction has occurred in the auxiliary heating/ventilation. The heating/ventilation function selected by the system is not available. The vehicle battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty. Deactivating the auxiliary heating/ventilation The auxiliary heating switches off automatically after 50 minutes. i This time limit can be altered. To do this, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Press the OFF button. Using the remote control, you can: Ractivate or deactivate the auxiliary heating/ventilation Rcheck the status of the auxiliary heating/ ventilation Z 179 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 180 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Sliding sunroof The following messages can appear in the display: Display Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is deactivated. The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. Checking the status of the auxiliary heating X Press the p or o button. The following messages can appear in the display: Display Meaning The auxiliary heating/ ventilation is deactivated. 180 A malfunction has occurred in the auxiliary heating/ventilation. The heating or ventilation function selected by the system is not available. The vehicle battery is not charged sufficiently or the system is faulty. The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehicle is faulty. The auxiliary ventilation is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary ventilation. The auxiliary heating is switched on. The number in the display shows the remaining time (in minutes) for the auxiliary heating. Sliding sunroof Sliding/tilting sunroof* G Risk of injury Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could operate the sliding/tilting sunroof and injure themselves. Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when you are opening and closing the sliding/tilting sunroof. If danger threatens, release the switch and push it briefly in any direction to stop the sliding/tilting sunroof. G Risk of injury The glass in the sliding/tilting sunroof could break in an accident. If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you could be thrown through the opening in the event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 181 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Sliding sunroof ! Only open the sliding/tilting sunroof if it Closing is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding/tilting sunroof. The seals could otherwise be damaged. X To close manually: pull the switch in the direction of arrow 2 and hold it until the sliding/tilting sunroof is in the desired position. X To close fully: pull the switch briefly beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2 and release it. X To stop: press or pull the switch in any direction. X Close the cover manually if necessary (Y page 182). i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding/tilting sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding/tilting sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. 1 To open 2 To close/lower 3 To raise X i It is also possible to open and close the sliding/tilting sunroof from the outside using the "Summer opening" (Y page 109) and "Convenience closing" (Y page 109) features respectively. Opening X To open manually: press the switch in the direction of arrow 1 and hold it until the sliding/tilting sunroof and the cover are in the desired position. X To open fully: press the switch briefly beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 1 and release it. X To stop: press or pull the switch in any direction. i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the sliding/tilting sunroof closes automatically, leaving a small gap open. Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Closing with increased force and without the anti-entrapment feature G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped and be seriously or fatally injured as you close the sliding/tilting sunroof with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature. If the sliding/tilting sunroof locks up during closing: X Immediately after it locks up, pull the switch again to the pressure point in the 181 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 182 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Sliding sunroof direction of arrow 2 until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed. The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed with more force. If the sliding/tilting sunroof locks up during closing again: X Immediately after it locks up, pull the switch again to the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2 until the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed. The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Raising The sliding/tilting sunroof can be raised at the rear for ventilation. X To raise manually: press the switch in the direction of arrow 3 and hold it until the sliding/tilting sunroof is in the desired position. X To raise fully: briefly press the switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 3 and release it. X To stop: press or pull the switch in any direction. 182 Lowering and closing X i The sliding/tilting sunroof does not close if: To lower manually: pull the switch in the direction of arrow 2 and hold it until the sliding/tilting sunroof is in the desired position. X To lower fully: pull the switch briefly beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2 and release it. X To stop: press or pull the switch in any direction. Rain closing feature* The sliding/tilting sunroof closes automatically: Rif it starts to rain Rat extreme outside temperatures Rafter 12 hours Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply The rear of the sliding/tilting sunroof is then raised in order to ventilate the interior of the vehicle. i The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened slightly again if it is obstructed while being closed by the rain closing feature. The rain closing feature is then deactivated. Rit is raised at the rear Rit is blocked Rno rain is falling on the windscreen (e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge or in a carport) Opening and closing the cover The cover functions as a sunblind. When you open the sliding/tilting sunroof, the cover moves back with it. When the sliding/tilting sunroof is closed or raised at the rear, you can open or close the cover manually. Resetting the sliding/tilting sunroof Reset the sliding/tilting sunroof if it does not move smoothly, or if the battery was disconnected or discharged. X Remove the fuse for the sliding/tilting sunroof in the main fuse box (Y page 341). X Reinsert the fuse. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 183 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Sliding sunroof X Press the switch in the direction of arrow 3 and hold it until the sliding/tilting sunroof is fully raised at the rear. X Keep the switch pressed for an additional second. X Make sure that the sliding/tilting sunroof can be opened or closed fully again (Y page 181). X If this is not the case, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Panorama sliding sunroof with roller sunblind* Panorama sliding sunroof G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the panorama sliding sunroof. If danger threatens, release the switch and push it briefly in any direction to stop the panorama sliding sunroof. G Risk of injury The glass in the panorama sliding sunroof could break in an accident. If you are not wearing a seat belt, there is a risk that you * optional could be thrown through the opening in the event of the vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. The switch is on the front overhead control panel. ! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the panorama sliding sunroof. The seals could otherwise be damaged. i When the panorama sliding sunroof is open, resonance noises may occur as well as the usual airflow noises. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the panorama sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. i It is also possible to open and close the panorama sliding sunroof from the outside using the "Summer opening" (Y page 109) and the "Convenience closing" (Y page 109) features respectively. 1 To open 2 To close 3 To raise 4 To lower X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Opening X To open manually: press the switch in the direction of arrow 1 and hold it until the i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the pan- orama sliding sunroof closes automatically, leaving a small gap open. Z 183 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 184 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Sliding sunroof panorama sliding sunroof has moved to the desired position. X To open fully: press the switch briefly beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 1 and release it. X To stop: press or pull the switch in any direction. Closing X Press the switch in the direction of arrow 2 and hold it until the panorama sliding sunroof has moved to the desired position. Roller sunblinds The roller sunblinds provide protection from the sun. The two roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed together when the panorama sliding sunroof is closed. G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you open or close the roller sunblinds. The switch is on the overhead control panel. 2 To open the roller sunblind Raising The panorama sliding sunroof can be raised at the rear for ventilation. X Press the rear section of the switch in the direction of arrow 3 and hold it until the panorama sliding sunroof has moved to the desired position. Lowering and closing X Pull the rear section of the switch in the direction of arrow 4 and hold it until the panorama sliding sunroof has lowered at the rear and is fully closed. 184 Rear overhead control panel 1 To close the roller sunblind X Front overhead control panel 1 To open the panorama sliding sunroof/ roller sunblind 2 To close the panorama sliding sunroof/ roller sunblind Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Opening X Pull the switch on the front overhead control panel in the direction of arrow 1 and hold it until the roller sunblinds have moved to the desired position. or X Press the switch on the rear overhead control panel in the direction of arrow 2 and hold it until the roller sunblinds have moved to the desired position. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 185 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Sliding sunroof To open the roller sunblinds fully, proceed as follows: Resetting the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds X Check that the panorama sliding sunroof can be opened fully again (Y page 183). Pull the switch on the front overhead control panel beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 1. Reset the panorama sliding sunroof and the roller sunblinds if the panorama sliding sunroof does not move smoothly, or if the battery was disconnected or discharged. X Remove the fuse for the panorama sliding sunroof in the main fuse box (Y page 341). X If this is not the case, consult a qualified specialist workshop. X or X Press the switch on the rear overhead control panel beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2. X To stop: press or pull one of the switches in any direction. Closing X Press the switch on the front overhead control panel in the direction of arrow 2 and hold it until the roller sunblinds have moved to the desired position. or X Pull the switch on the rear overhead control panel in the direction of arrow 1 and hold it until the roller sunblinds have moved to the desired position. X Reinsert the fuse. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Close the roller sunblinds fully. X Keep the switch pressed for an additional second. X Open the roller sunblinds fully. X Keep the switch pressed for an additional second. X Raise the panorama sliding sunroof fully. X Keep the switch pressed for an additional second. X Close the panorama sliding sunroof fully. X Keep the switch pressed for an additional second. Z 185 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 186 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Loading and stowing Cup holder* in the centre console Cup holder in the rear seat armrest Cup holder G Risk of injury Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange Rare direction suddenly involved in an accident Only use the cup holders for containers of a suitable size and which have lids. Otherwise, the drinks could spill. Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks. Otherwise, you may scald yourself. 186 X To open: press the marking on the cup holder lightly. The cup holder slides out automatically. i You can remove the cup holder to clean X To open: press the front of the cup holder. The cup holder slides out automatically. Cup holder in the folding bench seat* it. Clean the cup holder with clean, lukewarm water only. When reinserting the cup holder, make sure that you insert it into the guides. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 187 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing X To open: press the front of the cup holder. The cup holder is released. X Pull the cup holder out to the stop. Position the load on the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, make sure that you can: Roof rack system* Rraise G Risk of accident and injury Ropen the panorama sliding sunroof* fully An incorrectly secured roof rack, ski rack or load could work loose from the vehicle. These objects may then be thrown around and can injure you or others or cause an accident. Follow the roof rack/ski rack manufacturer's installation instructions and special instructions for use. The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling. You must always observe the maximum roof load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, traffic and weather conditions and drive with particular care if the roof is laden. Ropen the sliding/tilting sunroof* fully the boot lid or tailgate fully Estate X Saloon Secure the roof rack to the roof rails. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. 1 Covers X Fold covers 1 upwards. X Only secure the roof rack to the anchorage points under covers 1. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof rack systems which have been tested and approved for MercedesBenz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. * optional Z 187 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 188 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing X Skibag* G Risk of injury Press release button 1. The flap opens downwards. The skibag is designed to carry up to four pairs of skis. Do not use the skibag to carry any other type of load. The skibag must always be secured when laden. Otherwise, injuries could be caused by it in the event of an accident. Unfolding the skibag and loading skis 1 Skibag X Pull skibag 1 into the vehicle interior. The skibag unfolds. Skibag X Open the boot lid or tailgate. X Slide the skis into the skibag from the boot/luggage compartment. 1 Cover 2 Release catches X Fold down the rear seat armrest. X Press release catches 2 together and fold down cover 1. 188 Saloon shown as an example 1 Release button 1 Strap * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 189 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing X Pull strap 1 tight by the loose end until the skis are held firmly inside the skibag. X Stow the skibag in the rear seat backrest. 4 Skibag frame X Fold the cover back up. X Press button 1. Flap 2 folds down. X Press catch 3 in and pull out frame 4 containing the skibag. i Saloon: You should always close the flap in the boot if you do not require the skibag. This will prevent access to the boot from the vehicle interior. Removing the skibag 1 Hook 2 Securing ring X Engage hook 1 in securing ring 2. X Pull the strap tight by the loose end. The skibag can be removed for cleaning or drying. X Open the boot lid or tailgate. i You can remove the skibag even if you have folded the rear seat backrest forwards. G Risk of poisoning Saloon: When the skibag has been removed, always drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle interior. Removing the skis and folding up the skibag X Loosen the two straps. X Remove the hook from the securing ring. X Take the skis out of the skibag. X Close the flap in the boot/luggage compartment. X Smooth out the skibag and fold it up. 1 Button 2 Flap 3 Catch Z 189 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 190 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Luggage net in the front-passenger footwell G Risk of injury Only place lightweight objects in the luggage net. Do not use it to transport heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects. The luggage net cannot secure the objects sufficiently in the event of an accident. G Risk of poisoning Keep the boot lid/tailgate closed while the vehicle is in operation. Otherwise, exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior and poison you. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should therefore load your vehicle as shown in the illustrations. Distribution of the load within the vehicle: Estate Loading guidelines Observe the following notes when transporting a load: G Risk of injury Secure and position the load as described in the loading guidelines. Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be injured by the load being thrown around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. This also applies to seats which have been removed. You will find further information in the "Securing a load" section. Even if you follow all the loading guidelines, the load will increase the risk of injury in the event of an accident. 190 RWhen transporting a load, never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants). RPosition heavy loads as far forwards and as Distribution of the load within the vehicle: Saloon low in the boot or luggage compartment as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the backrests. RAlways place the load against the front or rear seat backrests. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 191 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing ROnly load the additional loading floor in the boot up to a maximum of 20 kg. Securing a load RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and Plastic hooks (Saloon) i Load restraints are available at any quali- On vehicles without a through-loading feature in the rear bench seat*, four plastic hooks are fitted to the boot floor. You can use these to attach the luggage securing feature which is available as an accessory. wear-resistant load restraints. Pad sharp edges for protection. fied specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. RDo not route lashing materials across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. Boot or luggage compartment There are four lashing eyelets in the boot or luggage compartment. Lashing eyelets* G Risk of injury Load the lashing eyes evenly. Otherwise, you or others could be injured by the load transported being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange RIf the rear seats are not occupied, insert the belt tongue on the outer seat belts into the buckle of the opposite seat belt. This increases the restraining effect of the rear seat backrests. Rhave direction suddenly an accident Saloon with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat* 1 Lashing eyelets Observe the loading guidelines. Observe the following points or guidelines when securing loads: RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load as these are only intended as an antislip protection for light loads. * optional Z 191 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 192 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Stowage well under the luggage compartment floor (Estate) G Risk of injury Estate 1 Lashing eyelets 1 Handle X To open: pull handle 1 and fold up the boot floor. Stowage well under the boot floor (Saloon) Do not carry heavy or hard objects under the luggage compartment floor if it is open and the objects are not secured. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. Vehicles without a folding bench seat* TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located underneath the rear luggage compartment floor. A loading tray and a folding box are located under the front luggage compartment floor. TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage well. 1 Locking mechanism X 192 Fold locking mechanism 1 down in the direction of the arrow. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 193 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Opening and closing the luggage compartment floor X Opening Press front luggage compartment floor 1 down using handle 3 until it is locked. Closing the rear luggage compartment floor 2 Rear luggage compartment floor 4 To lock in position 1 Front luggage compartment floor 2 Rear luggage compartment floor 3 Handle X Open the tailgate. X Press the ribbing (arrow) down on handle 3. The handle folds upwards. X Using handle 3, fold up front luggage compartment floor 1 or rear luggage compartment floor 2 to a vertical position. 5 Bag hook 6 Pneumatic spring X Press rear luggage compartment floor 2 slightly towards the front 4. Pneumatic spring 6 engages, locking rear luggage compartment floor 2 in position. i You can transport objects with the luggage compartment floor open and hang light items of luggage on bag hooks 5. 6 Pneumatic spring 7 Release button X Press release button 7 and fold down rear luggage compartment floor 2. X Press rear luggage compartment floor 2 down using handle 3 until it is locked. Closing the front luggage compartment floor X Fold down front luggage compartment floor 1. Z 193 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 194 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Removing the rear luggage compartment floor X Fold rear luggage compartment floor 2 upwards to an almost vertical position (an angle of 85°). i Rear luggage compartment floor 2 can only be extended out of the left-hand pin at an angle of 85°. X 1 To raise 2 Rear luggage compartment floor 3 Retainer 4 To extend 5 Pneumatic spring 6 Release catch Grasp the top of rear luggage compartment floor 2, raise it on left-hand side 1 and extend it towards the left out of right-hand pin 4. 2 Loading tray 3 Folding box 4 Transverse brace 5 Release catch X Remove loading tray 2. X Slide release catch 5 as far as it will go to the right and press transverse brace 4 upwards on the left-hand side. X Disconnect and remove transverse brace 4 towards the left out of the guide. Extending the luggage compartment floor X Remove the rear luggage compartment floor (Y page 194). X Open the front luggage compartment floor (Y page 193). X Open rear luggage compartment floor 2 (Y page 193). X Slide release catch 6 upwards and remove pneumatic spring 5 from the bolt towards the left. 1 Front luggage compartment floor 4 Transverse brace X Press pneumatic spring 5 into retainer 3. X 6 Retainer 1 Front luggage compartment floor 194 Remove transverse brace 4. To do this, insert transverse brace 4 into two retain- Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 195 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing ers 6 on front luggage compartment floor 1. i You must release both retainers 6 to remove transverse brace 4. To do this, press the tabs under retainer 6 forwards. i You can insert loading tray 2 under either the rear or the front luggage compartment floor. Vehicles with a folding bench seat* TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage well. X Remove the seat cushion from the folding bench seat (Y page 87). X Pull handle 1 and fold up luggage compartment floor 2. Closing the luggage compartment floor X Fold down luggage compartment floor 2 and press it down until it locks in place. Retaining hooks in the boot (Saloon) There is a hook on the upper edge of the boot, on which you can hang items such as bags. Opening the luggage compartment floor Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat* (Saloon) The left-hand and right-hand rear seats can be folded down to increase the boot capacity. If you are transporting a long load, you can remove the rear bench seat cushions (Y page 197). G Risk of injury Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle or in the boot unless they are secured. Vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around in the vehicle in the event of: Rsharp braking Ra change of direction or Ran accident G Risk of poisoning Always drive with the boot lid closed. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle interior. 1 Tab 2 Hook 1 Handle 2 Luggage compartment floor * optional X Pull down hook 2 by tab 1. Folding the rear bench seat forwards ! The seat cushion must always be released and folded up before the backrest is folded 195 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 196 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing forward. Otherwise, the backrest upholstery could be damaged. 1 Seat cushion 2 Backrest 1 Release i If the driver's or front-passenger seat has been adjusted for a tall person, it may be necessary to move the seats forwards slightly to fold the backrests forwards. i Vehicles with memory function*: if one or both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded forwards, the respective front seat is moved forwards slightly to avoid contact with the backrest and the backrest moves to a more upright position. X Pull release 1. The seat cushion springs upwards slightly. 196 X Reach behind seat cushion 1 and fold the seat cushion forwards. i If a passenger is to travel on the centre rear seat, it may be necessary to: Rpush the centre seat belt buckle inwards ! Before folding the left-hand backrest for- wards, make sure that the centre seat belt buckle is located under the right-hand backrest. To do this, it may be necessary to tuck the seat belt buckle under the foldeddown backrest as indicated by the arrows. Otherwise, the seat belt buckle or the backrest could be damaged. while tilting the right-hand backrest forwards or Rif the right-hand backrest has already been tilted forwards, fold the middle seat belt buckle back up. i You can also remove the seat cushion (Y page 197). * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 197 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Folding the rear bench seat back Removing the seat cushions You can achieve a larger loading area by removing the rear bench seat cushions. X Make sure that the seat cushions are folded forward (Y page 195) and that the head restraints are removed (Y page 83). X Open the boot/luggage compartment. X Pull the right-hand or left-hand release handle on the backrest. The corresponding backrest is released and the head restraints fold back. X Fold backrest 2 forwards. 1 Seat cushion 2 Backrest X Swing backrest 2 back until it engages. X Swing seat cushion 1 back. X Push down on seat cushion 1 at the front and in the middle until it engages. X Fold up and adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 81). ! Make sure that the head restraints fit fully in the seat cushion pockets. This prevents damage to the backrests while loading. 1 Release catch 2 Connector for seat heating* ! On vehicles with rear seat heating*, the electrical contact on the bottom of the cushion must be disconnected before removing the seat cushion. G Risk of injury Make sure that the rear seat backrest and the seat cushions are fully locked in place. X Press the connection together on the upper part of the lengthways side and pull out Z * optional 197 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 198 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing seat heating connector 2 from the seat cushion. i Join the connections for the seat heating, making sure the connector clicks into place, when replacing the cushion. X Pull seat cushion release catch 1 and remove the seat cushion upwards. ! Leave the seat cushion hinge in this position. If you fold it back, you could damage the upholstery. X Fold the backrest forward. Enlarging the luggage compartment (Estate) The left-hand and right-hand rear seats can be folded down to increase the luggage compartment capacity. If the combined luggage cover and net is fitted with the luggage compartment cover and safety net, you can only fold the right-hand backrest forwards on its own or both backrests if you first fold the right-hand backrest forwards. G Risk of poisoning Always drive with the tailgate closed. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle interior. Folding the rear bench seat forwards G Risk of injury Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the vehicle or in the luggage compartment unless they are secured. Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident. You must always fold the seat cushions forward and attach the safety net when using the luggage compartment enlargement. 1 Seat cushion release handle 2 Seat cushion i If the driver's or front-passenger seat has been adjusted for a tall person, it may be necessary to move the seats forwards slightly to fold the backrests forwards. i Vehicles with a memory function*: if one or both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded forwards, the respective front seat 198 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 199 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing is moved forwards slightly to avoid contact with the backrest and the backrest moves to a more upright position. X Pull seat cushion release handle 1. Seat cushion 2 is released. X Fold seat cushion 2 upwards. i If persons are to travel on the centre rear seat, it may be necessary to: Rpush the centre seat belt buckle inwards while tilting the right-hand backrest forwards or Rif the right-hand backrest has already been tilted forwards, fold the middle seat belt buckle back up. i You can also remove the seat cushion (Y page 200). ! Before folding the backrests forwards, make sure that: Rthe centre seat belt buckle is under the right-hand backrest. Otherwise, the seat belt buckle or the backrest could be damaged. Rthe head restraints are folded back and fully inserted, otherwise the head restraints could make contact with the raised rear seat cushion or be damaged. 1 Retainer for the seat belt X Guide the seat belt into retainer 1. X Fold back the head restraints (Y page 81). X The two outer head restraints are fully inserted (Y page 82). 1 Backrest release catch 2 Backrest X Pull left-hand or right-hand backrest release catch 1 upwards. Corresponding backrest 2 is unlocked. X Fold backrest 2 forwards. Z 199 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 200 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Folding the rear bench seat back Removing the seat cushions You can achieve a larger loading area by removing the rear bench seat cushions. X Make sure that the seat cushions are folded forward (Y page 198). i When refitting the seat cushion, join the connections for the seat heating, making sure the connector engages. X Pull seat cushion release catch 1 and remove the seat cushion upwards. ! Leave the seat cushion hinge in this position. If you fold it back, you could damage the upholstery. 1 Seat cushion 2 Backrest X Swing backrest 2 back until it engages. X Swing seat cushion 1 back. X Push down on seat cushion 1 at the front and in the middle until it engages. X Fold up and adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 81). 1 Release catch 2 Connector for seat heating* ! On vehicles with rear seat heating*, the electrical contact on the bottom of the cushion must be disconnected before removing the seat cushion. G Risk of injury Make sure that the rear seat backrest and the seat cushions are fully locked in place. 200 X X Fold backrest forward (Y page 198). Press the connection together on the upper part of the lengthways side and pull out seat heating connector 2 from the seat cushion. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 201 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Adjusting the backrest position X Once backrest 2 is disengaged, pull release catch 1 upwards again. X Fold backrests 2 of the left-hand and right-hand seats back until they engage. Backrests 2 are now in the second position. Luggage compartment cover and safety net (Estate) 1 Backrest release catch 2 Backrest The luggage cover and the safety net are attached to the rear bench seat backrest as a combined luggage cover and net. i You can adjust the backrests to a second, Safety net upright position. This creates a larger load capacity where necessary or greater seating comfort on the folding bench seat. X Pull release catch 1 on the right-hand seat upwards and fold backrest 2 forwards. X Once backrest 2 is disengaged, pull release catch 1 upwards again. X Pull release catch 1 on the left-hand seat upwards and fold backrest 2 forwards. G Risk of injury The safety net cannot secure heavy loads. You should therefore always lash down the load. You could otherwise be injured by objects which have not been sufficiently secured being thrown around in the event of sharp braking, a sudden change of direction or an accident. 1 Safety net 2 Safety net retainers X Pull safety net 1 up and hook it into retainers 2. i You can also use the safety net when the rear seat backrest is folded down. In this case, you should hook the safety net into the front retainers. Luggage compartment cover The luggage cover is released automatically when the tailgate is opened or closed, and is automatically raised or lowered. It is therefore not necessary to roll up the luggage cover before loading and unloading the vehicle. 201 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 202 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing ! While loading the vehicle, make sure that the luggage compartment is not loaded above the lower edge of the side windows. Otherwise, the combined luggage cover and net could be damaged when the tailgate is closed. Do not place objects on the luggage compartment cover. Rolling up the luggage compartment cover To do this, pull luggage compartment cover 2 slightly to the rear and lower it. X Release luggage compartment cover 2. Luggage compartment cover 2 rolls up of its own accord. Pulling out the luggage compartment cover X Pull out luggage compartment cover 2 until it engages. Removing the combined luggage cover and net X Roll up the safety net and luggage cover 2. 1 Grab handle 2 Luggage compartment cover X Pull luggage cover 2 down to the horizontal by handle 1. X Unhook luggage cover 2 from the retainers on the left and right-hand sides. 202 X Fold both rear seat cushions forwards (Y page 198). X Fold the right-hand backrest, and then the left-hand backrest forwards (Y page 198). X Push the combined luggage cover and net to the left and out of the retainers on the rear seat backrest and remove it. EASY-PACK system* EASY-PACK load-securing kit* Your EASY-PACK load-securing kit comes with accessories which allow you to use your boot/luggage compartment in a variety of ways. You can store the load-securing kit in the wallet provided. i Estate: on vehicles with a stowage box* in the luggage compartment, you can keep the wallet and the telescopic rod in the stowage box. Illustration: Estate 1 Loading rails * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 203 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Inserting the mounting elements into the loading rail Illustration: Estate 1 Loading rail L To remove the mounting element S To push the mounting element to the next detent G Risk of injury Spread the load evenly between the lashing eyelets. Observe the loading guidelines. X Turn mounting element 2 to L. X X Insert mounting element 2 into loading rail 1. Turn mounting element 2 in the loading rail to N. X X Turn mounting element 2 to ‹ until you feel it clearly engage in loading rail 1. Insert lashing eyelet 1 into mounting element 2. X Turn mounting element 2 to ‹ until you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail. Inserting the lashing eyelet into the mounting element Belt reel 2 Mounting element You can slide mounting element 2 in loading rail 1 to various detents and secure it. These detents are marked and positioned at 5-cm intervals along loading rail 1. You can turn the mounting element in the loading rail to four different positions: ‹ To lock the mounting element N To release the lashing eyelet, the belt reel or the telescopic rod 1 Lashing eyelet 2 Mounting element Illustration: Estate 1 Belt reel 2 Mounting element 3 Locking button Z 203 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 204 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing i The belt reel can be used to secure light loads against the side wall of the boot/luggage compartment to prevent them from moving around. Telescopic rod G Risk of injury X Insert two mounting elements 2 into a loading rail. X Turn mounting elements 2 in the loading rail to N. X Insert belt reel 3 into mounting elements 2. X Turn mounting element 2 to ‹ until you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail. Illustration: Estate 1 Telescopic rod X Press locking button 1 on the belt reel and pull the safety net out in the direction of the arrow. 2 Mounting element X X X EASY-PACK stowage box* (Estate) When you are using the stowage box in the luggage compartment, the backrests of the seats directly in front of it must be fully engaged to the rear and the combined luggage cover and net must be fitted. The maximum stowage box load is 20 kg. A greater load could come loose in the event of an accident or sudden and sharp braking, and could injure yourself or other occupants. i The telescopic rod can be used to secure the load against the rear seats to prevent it from moving around. Place the load between the securing net and the boot/luggage compartment side wall. X Press locking button 3 on the belt reel with one hand. Insert one mounting element 2 into each loading rail. X With your other hand, slowly extend the net around the load until it is secure. Turn mounting elements 2 in the loading rail to N. X Insert telescopic rod 1 into mounting elements 2. 1 Stowage box 2 Luggage compartment floor X Turn mounting element 2 to ‹ until you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail. 3 Rear seat backrests 4 Catches 204 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 205 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Installing the stowage box X Fold the two backrests 3 forward (Y page 198). X Guide stowage box 1 into the luggage compartment through one of the rear doors with the opening facing towards the front of the vehicle. X Press catches 4 on stowage box 1 into the gap between backrest 3 and the luggage compartment floor. X Fold backrest 3 back (Y page 200). i Stowage box 1 is also held in place from above by the combined luggage cover and net. Loading the stowage box X Fold backrest 3 forward (Y page 198). X Load stowage box 1 through the opening on the front. i Stowage box 1 in the luggage compartment is closed off by the rear bench seat and can carry a maximum load of 20 kg. X Fold backrest 3 back (Y page 200). Removing the stowage box X Fold double backrest 3 forward (Y page 198). X Slide stowage box 1 with catches 4 forwards to remove it from the mountings. X Remove stowage box 1 sideways through a rear door. X Fold backrest 3 back (Y page 200). Do not carry hard objects in the ruffled pockets. Objects must not protrude over the top of the ruffled pockets. i You will find an overview of the stowage compartments on (Y page 36). Glove compartment Stowage compartments G Risk of injury The stowage compartments must be closed when items are stored in them. Luggage nets are not designed to secure heavy items of luggage. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange Rhave direction suddenly an accident Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be carried in the luggage net. 1 Spectacles compartment/compartment for mobile phone 2 Opening button for the glove compart- ment The glove compartment can be locked and unlocked using the emergency key element (Y page 306). X To open: press opening button 2. X To close: fold the cover upwards. 205 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 206 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Loading and stowing Spectacles compartment/compartment for mobile phone X To open: press lightly on compartment 1. X Stowage compartment in front of the armrest X To remove the insert: pull out the insert by handle 1. Stowage compartment/telephone compartment under the armrest To close: slide compartment 1 back in until it clicks into place. Stowage compartment in the centre console X To open: press lightly on the marking at the rear of the cover. The cover opens. 1 Handle X 1 Cover 2 Insert X To open: press lightly on the marking on the bottom of cover 1. The stowage compartment opens. i Insert 2 can be removed for cleaning. 206 1 Handle To open: pull handle 1. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 207 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Features Stowage compartment in the rear centre console Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest Features Sun visors G Risk of accident Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered while driving. You could otherwise be dazzled by bright lights, impairing your view of traffic conditions. As a result you could cause an accident. X To open: press lightly on the top of the stowage compartment. The stowage compartment moves out automatically. X To open: push the handle upwards and raise the armrest. 1 Mirror light* 2 Retainer 3 Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket 4 Vanity mirror 5 Mirror cover Z * optional 207 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 208 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Features Mirror in the sun visor Mirror light* 1 only comes on if the sun visor is clipped into retainer 2 and mirror cover 5 has been folded up. Roller sunblinds* for the rear side windows damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either close the window or retract the roller sunblind before driving at high speeds. Rear window blind* (Saloon) Glare from the side 1 Tab 2 Retainers X 1 Sun visor 2 Additional sun visor* 3 Retainer X Fold down sun visor 1. X Pull sun visor 1 from retainer 3. X Swing sun visor 1 to the side. X Slide sun visor 1 forwards and back as desired. X Fold down additional sun visor* 2. 208 To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and hook it onto retainers 2 at the top of the window. ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do not let it snap back suddenly, as this would damage the automatic roller mechanism. ! If you drive with the roller sunblind exten- 1 To extend or retract the rear window blind ! Make sure that the rear window blind can move freely. Otherwise, the blind or other objects could be damaged. i Always drive with the rear window blind either fully extended or retracted. ded and the window open, the roller sunblind may pop out of the retainer and suddenly spring back if you drive at high speeds, e.g. on the motorway. This could * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 209 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Features X To extend or retract: briefly press button 1. The rear window blind fully extends or fully retracts. X To stop: briefly press button 1 again. Ashtray* Ashtray in the cockpit X To open: press lightly on the marking at the bottom of cover 1. The ashtray opens. X To open: press lightly on the top of ashtray 3. The ashtray opens. X To remove the insert: press sliding knob 2 to the right. The ashtray insert slides out slightly. X To remove the insert: fold over cinder bar 1 with your finger and lift insert 2 upwards. X To refit the insert: press the insert into the holder until it clicks into place. X To refit the insert: press the insert into the holder until it clicks into place. Ashtray in the rear compartment The ashtray is located in the rear doors. Cigarette lighter* G Risk of injury and fire Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob. Otherwise, you might burn yourself. Make sure that children travelling in the vehicle are not able to injure themselves on the hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it. 1 Cover 2 Sliding knob 1 Cinder bar 2 To remove the insert 3 Ashtray Z * optional 209 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 210 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Features 12V socket The socket can be used for accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 watts. X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Socket in the rear passenger compartment The rear socket is located in the stowage compartment of the centre console. Socket in the cockpit 1 Cigarette lighter X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press lightly on the marking at the bottom of the cover. The ashtray opens. X A socket is fitted in the centre console on vehicles with the non-smoker's package. 1 Socket X Press lightly on the top of the stowage compartment. The stowage compartment slides out automatically. X Fold the socket cover upwards. Press in cigarette lighter 1. Cigarette lighter 1 will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. 1 Socket X X 210 Press lightly on the marking at the bottom of the cover. The stowage compartment opens. Fold cover of socket 1 out to the right. i The Estate has an additional socket on the left-hand side of the luggage compartment. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 211 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Features Mobile phone* G Risk of accident Observe the legal requirements of the country in which you are currently driving regarding operating mobile communications equipment in a vehicle. If it is permitted by law to operate communications equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you must only do so when the traffic situation allows. You could otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself and others. Two-way radios and fax equipment used without low-reflection exterior aerials can interfere with the vehicle's electronics and thereby jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle and your safety. You must therefore only use this equipment if it is correctly connected to a separate reflection-free exterior aerial. G Risk of injury Excessive electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions * optional relating to the possible health risk posed by electromagnetic fields. i In order to ensure optimum signal quality for mobile phones and to minimise mutual interference between the vehicle electronics and mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. An exterior aerial conducts the electromagnetic fields generated by a wireless device to the exterior of the vehicle; the field strength within the vehicle interior is lower than in a vehicle that does not have an exterior aerial. Inserting the mobile phone into the mobile phone bracket If the mobile phone is inserted into the mobile phone bracket, you can only speak to the person you are calling using the hands-free system. ! Do not attempt to remove the mobile phone and the telephone bracket together. You could otherwise damage the mobile phone bracket. X Remove the cover of the aerial plug from the back of the mobile phone and keep it in a safe place. i There are various mobile phone brackets that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some cases these are country-specific. You can obtain these mobile phone brackets from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The functions and services available when you use the phone depend on your mobile phone model and service provider. The mobile phone bracket is in the armrest. X Open the telephone compartment (Y page 206). Z 211 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 212 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Features i The system reads the phone book stored on the SIM card and in the mobile phone memory. If the same entry is stored in both of the phone books, both of these entries will be shown in the multi-function display. You can make a call using the s and t buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. You can control other mobile phone functions via the on-board computer (Y page 141). Example illustration 1 To engage the mobile phone 2 Connector contact 3 Mobile phone bracket X Slide the lower end of the mobile phone into connector contact 2 in mobile phone bracket 3. X Push the top part of the mobile phone in the direction of arrow 1 until it engages in mobile phone bracket 3. The mobile phone is connected to the hands-free system and to the multi-function steering wheel. The battery is charged depending on the charge status and the position of the key in the ignition lock. The charging process is shown in the mobile phone display. 212 i When you remove the key from the igni- tion lock, the mobile phone remains switched on for approximately ten minutes (run-on time). If you make a call during this time, the mobile phone will be switched off approximately ten minutes after you have ended the call. Run-on time: You can change the run-on time by making an additional phone book entry on the SIM card. For the name, enter "Idletime" and for the number, enter a figure between "1" and "30" (minutes). If you have not entered a number or have entered a different number, the run-on time of ten minutes will still apply. For information on how to create a phone book entry, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions. Own number sending: The hands-free system does not recognise whether own number sending is enabled or disabled in the mobile phone. The phone number is therefore always sent by default. By creating an additional phone book entry on the SIM card, you can switch the own number sending function on and off. For the name, enter "CALLID" and for the number, enter a "0" or a "1". Entering "0" will prevent the telephone number from being sent; entering "1" will allow it to be sent. For information on how to create a phone book entry, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 213 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Features Removing the mobile phone from the mobile phone bracket Removing the existing mobile phone bracket Example illustration 1 To release the mobile phone Example illustration 1 To release the mobile phone bracket 2 Mobile phone bracket X Press the release catch in the direction of arrow 1 and remove the mobile phone upwards from mobile phone bracket 2. Fitting a different mobile phone bracket 2 To remove the mobile phone bracket 3 Mobile phone bracket X Press the release button in the direction of arrow 1 and remove mobile phone bracket 3 in the direction of arrow 2. Fitting a different mobile phone bracket Example illustration 1 Contact plate 2 Recesses 3 Mobile phone bracket X Insert mobile phone bracket 3 into recesses 2 of contact plate 1. X Slide mobile phone bracket 3 forwards until it engages. If you require a different mobile phone bracket for your mobile phone, remove the existing mobile phone bracket and then fit the new one. Z 213 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 214 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Features Infrared reflecting windscreen* The infrared reflecting glass prevents the vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz range. Garage door opener* The remote control integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. i The garage door opener is only available for certain countries. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. The HomeLink® garage door opener is compatible with most European garage and gate opener drives. More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is available from: Rany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre HomeLink® hotline (0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or +49 (0) 6839 907-277 (at a charge) Rthe 1 Areas transparent to radio waves In order to operate radio-controlled equipment (e.g. toll recording systems), areas 1 on the windscreen are transparent to radio waves. You can install radio-controlled systems here. These areas can best be seen from outside the vehicle by observing the light reflected off the windscreen. Rthe internet: www.homelink.com Remote control in the rear-view mirror 1 Indicator lamp 2 Transmitter button 3 Transmitter button 4 Transmitter button G Risk of accident Only press the transmitter button on the integrated remote control if there are no persons or objects present within the sweep of the garage door. Persons could otherwise be injured as the door moves. Programming the remote control i You will achieve the best results by inserting new batteries in the garage door's remote control before programming it. 214 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 215 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Features X Erase the memory of the integrated remote control (Y page 216) before programming it for the first time. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold one of transmitter buttons 2 to 4 on the integrated remote control. Indicator lamp 1 starts to flash after a short while. It flashes about once a second. i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the first time the transmitter button is programmed. If this transmitter button has already been programmed, indicator lamp 1 will only start flashing at a rate of once a second after 20 seconds have elapsed. X Keep the transmitter buttons depressed. X Point the garage door's remote control with the transmitter towards the left-hand side of the rear-view mirror from a distance of 5 to 20 cm. i The distance between the garage door's remote control and the integrated garage door opener depends on the system of the garage door drive. You might require several attempts. You should test every posi- tion for at least 20 seconds before trying another position. X X Keep the transmitter button on the garage door's remote control depressed until indicator lamp 1 starts to flash rapidly. The programming was successful if indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Release the transmitter buttons on the garage door's remote control and the integrated remote control. If indicator lamp 1 goes out after approximately 20 seconds and did not flash rapidly before this: X Release the transmitter buttons on the integrated and portable remote controls. X Repeat the programming procedure. At the same time change the distance between the garage door's remote control and the transmitter buttons in the rear-view mirror. i If the garage door system works with a rolling code, after programming you must synchronise the remote control integrated in the rear-view mirror with the garage door system receiver. You will find further information in the garage door opening system's operating instructions, e.g. the sections on “Synchronising the transmitter” or “Registering a new transmitter”. You can also call the hotline mentioned above. Opening or closing the garage door Once programmed, the integrated remote control will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the transmitter button on the rearview mirror that you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with fixed code: indicator lamp 1 lights up continuously. Garage door system with rolling code: indicator lamp 1 flashes briefly and then lights up for approximately two seconds. This is repeated for up to 20 seconds. i The transmitter will transmit a signal for as long as the transmitter button is being pressed. The transmission will be halted after a maximum of 20 seconds and indi- 215 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 216 Version: 2.9.4 Controls Features cator lamp 1 will flash. Press the transmitter button again if necessary. Clearing the remote control memory X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press and hold transmitter buttons 2 and 4 for approximately 20 seconds until indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. The memory is cleared. secured can slip and thereby interfere with the movement of the pedals. Do not place floormats on top of one another. i You should clear the remote control memory before selling the vehicle. Floormat* on the driver's side G Risk of accident Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the pedals when floormats are used, and that the floormats are properly secured. The floormats must be secured at all times using retainers and studs. Before you drive off, make sure that the floormats are secure and rectify if necessary. A floormat which is not properly 216 1 Press-studs 2 Retainers X Slide seat backwards. X To fit: place the floormat in position. X Press stud 1 onto retainer 2. X To remove: pull floormat off retainers 2. X Remove the floormat. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 217 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Running-in notes ............................... Refuelling ........................................... Engine compartment ........................ Tyres and wheels .............................. Winter driving ................................... Driving tips ........................................ Driving abroad ................................... Trailer towing .................................... Service ............................................... Care .................................................... 218 218 222 227 234 236 238 239 243 244 217 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 218 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Refuelling Running-in notes The first 1,500 km If you treat the engine with sufficient care from the very start, it will reward you with excellent performance for a very long period afterwards. RYou should therefore drive at varying road and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km. RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this time. Do not exceed 2/3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear. RChange gear in good time. RDo not shift down a gear manually in order to brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission*: RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). ROnly use ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving, e.g. in mountainous terrain. After 1,500 km you may gradually bring the vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. Additional driving tips for AMG vehicles: 218 RDo not drive faster than 140 km/h for the first 1,500 km. ROnly bring the engine up to a maximum speed of 4,500 rpm for a brief period. i You should also observe these notes if the engine or rear axle transmission on your vehicle has been replaced. AMG vehicles with a rear axle differential lock* Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. To better protect the differential gear on the rear axle, you should perform an oil change after a runningin phase of 3,000 km. This oil change will increase the service life of your differential. Have the oil change performed at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. Refuelling Refuelling G Risk of explosion Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating* before refuelling. G Risk of injury Do not come into direct contact with fuel. Direct skin contact with fuels or the inhalation of fuel vapours is a health hazard. G Risk of fire Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This causes damage to the fuel system and engine and could result in the vehicle catching fire. ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel will cause damage to the injection system. Damage resulting from adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the warranty. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 219 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Refuelling ! If the wrong fuel has been added by mistake, do not switch on the ignition. If you do, the fuel could enter the fuel lines. The tank and the fuel lines would then have to be emptied. Inform a qualified specialist workshop and have the tank and the fuel lines emptied completely. When you open or close the vehicle with the key or KEYLESS GO*, the fuel filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked. The fuel filler flap is to the rear on the right. X Turn the fuel filler cap to the left and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap 2. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. ! Overfilling the tank could damage the fuel system. X X To close: replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages. Close the fuel filler flap. i Vehicles with a diesel engine: If the tank has been run completely dry, it will be necessary to bleed the fuel system (Y page 294). 1 To open the fuel filler flap 2 To insert the fuel cap 3 Tyre pressure table 4 Fuel type Petrol (EN 228) ! Refuel using only unleaded premium grade petrol with a minimum octane number of 95 RON/85 MON conforming to European standard EN 228. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. You will find further information about petrol under "Fuel" in the index. i As a temporary measure, but only when the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol, 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce performance and increase petrol consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle. In some countries, the available petrol quality may not be sufficient and could cause coking around the inlet valve. In such cases, and in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol may be mixed with the additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254510). You must observe the notes and mixing ratios given on the container. Z * optional 219 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 220 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Refuelling E 350 CGI ! Refuel using only unleaded premium grade petrol with a minimum octane number of 95 RON/85 MON conforming to European standard EN 228. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. You will find further information about petrol under "Technical data" in the index. i In some countries, only petrol of insuffi- cient quality (high-sulphur fuel) may be available. This fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant odours, especially on short journeys. Refuelling with petrol of sufficient quality (sulphur-free fuel) will reduce such odours. AMG vehicles ! Refuel using only super unleaded petrol with a minimum octane number of 98 RON/88 MON conforming to European standard EN 228. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. You will find further information about petrol under "Technical data" in the index. 220 i If the recommended fuel is not available and only as a temporary measure, you may also use premium unleaded petrol, 95 RON/85 MON. This may reduce performance and increase petrol consumption. You must avoid driving at full throttle. ! In emergencies, only when the recom- mended fuel is not available, you may also use standard unleaded petrol, 91 RON/ 82.5 MON. However, using this fuel results in considerably higher petrol consumption and significantly reduced performance. Avoid driving at full throttle, and only drive in drive program C. If no fuel other than regular petrol fuel 91 RON/82.5 MON or a lower grade is permanently available, you should have the vehicle adapted to run on this fuel by the local after-sales service. Diesel (EN 590) ! Only use diesel that complies with the EN 590 European standard. You could otherwise impair engine output or damage the engine. You will find further information about diesel under "Fuel" in the index. ! When refuelling vehicles with a diesel par- ticle filter in countries outside the EU, only low-sulphur Euro diesel with less than 0.005 percent sulphur content by weight should be used. In countries in which diesel with a higher sulphur content is available (e.g. 0.035 percent by weight), the engine oil should be renewed at more frequent intervals. More information about intervals for changing the engine oil can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Using fuel that does not comply with EN 590 can increase wear and damage the engine and the exhaust system. Do not use the following: RMarine diesel RHeating oil RBio-diesel Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 221 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Refuelling RVegetable oil RPetrol RPetroleum RKerosene Do not add such fuels to diesel fuel and do not use any special additives (exception: flow improvers – see "Low outside temperatures"). Damage caused by the use of unapproved fuels or additives is not covered by the warranty. E 300 BLUETEC ! When refuelling vehicles with a diesel par- ticle filter in countries outside the EU, only low-sulphur Euro diesel with less than 0.005 percent sulphur content by weight (< 50 ppm) should be used. Low outside temperatures The flow properties of diesel may be insufficient at low ambient temperatures. To prevent operating problems, diesel fuel with improved cold flow qualities is available during the winter months. Your vehicle must be refuelled with this winter diesel at temperatures of -5 °C or below. You can use this winter diesel at temperatures down to about -20 °C without problems. If only summer diesel fuel or less cold-resistant winter diesel fuel (e.g. in Mediterranean regions) is available, you should add an amount of flow improver to the fuel corresponding to the outside temperature. Mix the additive with the diesel in good time, before the flow properties of the diesel become insufficient. Otherwise, malfunctions can only be rectified by heating the entire fuel system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated garage. improvers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of fire Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This would damage the fuel system and engine and could result in a vehicle fire. Flow improver The effectiveness of a flow improver is not guaranteed with every fuel. Observe the information provided by the manufacturer when using a flow improver. Only use flow improvers that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information about flow Z 221 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 222 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Engine compartment Engine compartment Bonnet G Risk of accident Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open up and block your view. Opening G Risk of injury There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open, even if the engine is not running. Some engine components can become very hot. To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those components described in the Owner’s Manual and observe the relevant safety notes. G Risk of injury The radiator fan between the radiator and the engine can start automatically, even if the key has been removed from the ignition lock. For this reason you must not reach into the turning area of the fan. You can otherwise be injured. 222 Vehicles with a petrol engine: the electronic ignition system uses high voltage. For this reason you must never touch components of the ignition system (ignition coil, ignition cable, spark plug connector or test socket) when: Rthe engine is running Rthe engine is being started Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off and that the key has been pulled out of the ignition lock before opening the bonnet. The bonnet release lever is located in the driver's footwell. Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine is being cranked by hand Vehicles with a diesel engine: the electronic injection control uses high voltage. Therefore, never touch fuel injection system components when: Rthe engine is running Rthe engine is being started Rthe ignition is switched on X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are switched off. G Risk of injury The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage could be set in motion. When the bonnet is open, you or others could be injured by the wiper rods. 1 Bonnet release lever X Pull release lever 1. The bonnet is released. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are not folded out away from the windscreen. You can otherwise damage the windscreen wipers or the bonnet. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 223 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Engine compartment The handle for opening the bonnet is located above the radiator grille. X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a height of approximately 20 cm. Rthe X Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. Rthe i If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. Engine oil 2 Bonnet catch handle X Pull handle 2 of the bonnet catch outwards from the radiator grille and lift the bonnet from underneath by the radiator grille. Closing G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the bonnet. Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes a maximum of 0.8 l oil per 1,000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. You can only estimate the oil consumption after you have driven a considerable distance. You will find further information about engine oil in the "Technical data" section (Y page 385). Checking the engine oil level To do so: vehicle should be parked on level ground. engine should be switched off for at least five minutes if the engine was at normal operating temperature. Rthe engine should be switched off for at least 30 minutes if the engine was not at operating temperature (i.e. if you only started the engine briefly). Via the on-board computer* i Only possible on the E 420 CDI. On all other models a dipstick is used to check the engine oil level (Y page 224). X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 76). X Press the j or k button to select the message: Engine oil level Measuring now The measurement takes a few seconds. You will see one of the following messages in the display: REngine oil level OK RAdd 1.0 litre to reach maximum oil level * optional 223 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 224 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Engine compartment RAdd 1.5 litres to reach maximum oil level RAdd 2.0 litres to reach maximum oil level X Top up the oil if necessary (Y page 225). Other messages in the multi-function display If the engine is at normal operating temperature and there is too much oil, you will see the following message: Eng. oil level Reduce oil level X Have excess oil siphoned off. ! There is a risk of damage to the engine or the catalytic converter if there is excess oil in the engine. If the Switch ignition on to check engine oil level message appears: X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 76). You will see the following message if you did not observe the required waiting time: Observe waiting period 224 X Repeat the measurement after about five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. X Repeat the measurement after about 30 minutes if the engine is not at normal operating temperature (if the engine was only started briefly). The following message appears if the engine is running: Engine oil level Not when engine on X Switch off the engine and wait for five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature, or for about 30 minutes if the engine is not at normal operating temperature (if the engine was only started briefly), before measuring. i If you wish to cancel the measurement, press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel. Using the oil dipstick Illustration: vehicle with a petrol engine (E 350) 1 Oil dipstick 2 Maximum mark 3 Minimum mark X Pull oil dipstick 1 out of the oil dipstick tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick 1. X Insert oil dipstick 1 into the oil dipstick tube to the stop, and take it out again. The oil level is correct if the level is between minimum mark 3 and maximum mark 2. X Top up the oil if necessary. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 225 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Engine compartment i The difference in quantity between mini- Coolant mum mark 3 and maximum mark 2 is approximately 2 litres. G Risk of injury The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore, only unscrew the cap once the engine has cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge must display less than 70°C. You could otherwise be scalded by escaping hot coolant. i On vehicles with a 4-cylinder petrol engine and vehicles with an 8-cylinder petrol engine, the difference between MIN mark 3 and MAX mark 2 is approximately 1.5 litres. Topping up the engine oil Example of a vehicle with a diesel engine (E 220 CDI) 1 Cover X Unscrew cap 1 and remove it. X Top up with the amount of oil required. Coolant consists of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. ! Do not add too much oil. If too much oil is added and the oil level is above the maximum mark on the dipstick, the engine or catalytic converter could be damaged. Have excess oil siphoned off. Illustration: vehicle with a petrol engine (E 500) 1 Cover X Screw cap 1 onto the filler neck. H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. Oil must not be allowed to escape into the soil or waterways. You would otherwise be damaging the environment. Z 225 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 226 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Engine compartment Checking the coolant level X Top up the coolant if necessary. The expansion tank is located in the engine compartment on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Replace cap 1 and tighten all the way to the stop. You will find further information about coolant in the "Technical data" section (Y page 388). Windscreen washer system/headlamp cleaning system* 1 Cover 2 Expansion tank The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment on the right when viewed in the direction of travel. The headlamp cleaning system is also supplied from the washer fluid reservoir. Slowly turn cap 1 by half a turn anti-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap 1 further anti-clockwise and remove it. There is sufficient coolant in expansion tank 2 if the coolant is level with the marker bar 3 in the filler neck when cold or approximately 1.5 cm higher when hot. 226 Add windscreen washer concentrate to the washer fluid all year round. G Risk of fire Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when windscreen washer concentrate is being handled. Use Ra windscreen washer fluid additive such as MB Summerwash to prevent smearing (for temperatures above freezing). Ra windscreen washer fluid additive with antifreeze properties such as MB Winterwash (if there is a risk of frost). X 3 Marker bar X X Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a container beforehand. Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperatures. ! Only use windscreen washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Unsuitable windscreen washer fluid could damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. 1 Cover * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 227 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Tyres and wheels X To open: pull cap 1 upwards by the tab. Tyres and wheels X To close: press cap 1 onto the filler neck until it clicks into place. Points to remember ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tyres have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (with run-flat characteristics)* Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tyres* should only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by MercedesBenz. If you use other tyres and wheels, Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any responsibility for damage that may result from this. Further information about tyres, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If you use tyres other than those tested and recommended for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, characteristics such as handling, vehicle noise emissions and fuel consumption * optional may be adversely affected. In addition, the wheels may come into contact with the body or axle components when heavily loaded or when driving with snow chains. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. ! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not fit used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. G Risk of accident If wheels or tyres other than those which have been tested are fitted: Rthe brakes or chassis components could be damaged Rwheel and tyre clearances can no longer be guaranteed This could cause an accident. Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of spacer plates or brake dust shields. This invalidates the General Operating Permit for the vehicle. 227 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 228 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Tyres and wheels Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres ROnly RRegularly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the wheels. RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at moderate speeds for the first 100 km as they only reach their full performance after this distance. RFit new tyres on the front wheels first if tyres of the same size are required on the front and rear wheels. RReplace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the spare wheel*. RDo not drive with tyres which have too little tread depth as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). ! Store tyres that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and diesel. check the wheels and tyres of your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctures, tears, bumps on tyres and deformation, cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at least every 14 days, as well as after offroad trips or after travelling on rough roads. Damaged wheels could cause a loss of tyre pressure. RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tyre (Y page 229). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tyre surface. RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed and stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres inspected at a specialist workshop, for example at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs, speed humps or similar, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the sidewalls, could get damaged. the valve against dirt and moisture. RRegularly check the pressure of all your tyres (including the spare tyre*), particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 229). Notes on driving RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi- 228 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 229 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Tyres and wheels Direction of rotation Direction of rotation Tyres with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of aquaplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is observed. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. It is therefore recommended to additionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit* when fitting tyres that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tyres. i A TIREFIT kit* is available from any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. You will find notes on driving with a flat tyre in the "Practical advice" section (Y page 328). i You may fit a spare tyre* against the direction of rotation. MOExtended run-flat system* The MOExtended run-flat system allows you to continue driving the vehicle even when one or more tyres lose all air pressure. The MOExtended run-flat system may only be used in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor* and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. i Vehicles with MOExtended run-flat system are not equipped with the TIREFIT kit*30. 30 Only Tyre tread G Risk of accident Bear in mind that: Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads when the tread depth is less than 3 mm. You should thus replace tyres that have insufficient tread. Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the tread depth is 4 mm or less because otherwise they no longer provide adequate grip. Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly. You should thus regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. If necessary, turn the steering wheel so that you can see the tyre tread more easily. You could otherwise lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident due to the reduced grip of the tyres on the road. Tyre pressures G Risk of accident Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low has a negative effect on the vehicle’s driving safety, which could lead you to cause an accident. You should therefore regularly check the pressure of all your tyres (including the spare tyre*), particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary. To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the electronic tyre pressure monitor*, the tyre pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. for certain countries * optional 229 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 230 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Tyres and wheels If the vehicle is to be heavily laden or driven at high speeds, the tyre pressure must be adapted according to the specifications given in the fuel filler flap (Y page 218). Use the highest specified tyre pressure for the spare wheel*. G Risk of accident Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly: RCheck the tyre for foreign bodies. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. Tyre pressure that is too low has a negative effect on the vehicle’s active safety, which could lead to your causing an accident. Tyre pressure changes by approximately 0.1 bar for every 10 °C change in ambient temperature. If you measure the tyre pressure in enclosed spaces where the temperature differs from the outside temperature, you will have to correct the measured value accordingly. When the vehicle is driven, the tyre temperature, and with it the tyre pressure, will increase depending on the road speed and the load on the tyres. 31 Only 230 Therefore, you should only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. The pressure of warm tyres should only be corrected if it is too low for the current operating conditions. You will find a table of tyre pressures for various operating conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap. Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or too low can: Rshorten the service life of the tyres Rcause increased tyre damage Rhave a negative effect on handling characteristics (e.g. by causing aquaplaning) E 350 CGI31/E 300 BLUETEC: the values on the tyre pressure information label (fuel filler flap) are for the use of the vehicle in partially laden and fully laden condition whilst driving at maximum speed. Despite what is stated on the tyre pressure information label, for speeds up to 210 km/h the values stated can be reduced as follows, without a reduction in safety: -0.4 bar /-6 psi: E 350 CGI -0.3 bar/-4 psi: E 300 BLUETEC This improves the ride comfort of your vehicle, however the fuel consumption could increase slightly. Also check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel*. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. Tyre pressure loss warning system G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure loss warning system does not replace the need to regularly check your vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of pressure on several tyres at the same time cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss warning system. The tyre pressure loss warning system is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of for certain countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 231 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Tyres and wheels pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pressure loss warning system monitors the set tyre pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multi-function display. The function of the tyre pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's tyres Rroad Ryou conditions are wintry are driving on sand or gravel Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration) Ryou Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof) Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning system Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged Rfitted X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The standard display appears in the multifunction display (Y page 125). X Press k or j to select the tyre pressure function: Run Flat Indicator active Menu: R-Button æ X Press the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster. The following message appears in the multi-function display: Restart Run Flat Indicator? Yes Cancel the wheels or tyres new wheels or tyres X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four tyres is set correctly for the operating conditions concerned. X Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 229). G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tyre pressure. If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. A tyre with insufficient pressure results in an instability of the vehicle when driving, thus increasing the risk of an accident. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the æ button. The following message appears in the multi-function display: Run Flat Indicator restarted After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tyre pressures of all four tyres. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the ç button. or X Z Wait until the message 231 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 232 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Tyres and wheels Restart Run Flat Indicator? Yes Cancel disappears. The tyre pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Checking the tyre pressure electronically* The tyre pressure monitor only functions if the correct wheel electronics are fitted to all wheels. These monitor the pressure in all four tyres, which you have set when restarting the tyre pressure monitor. The monitor warns you when the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. G Risk of accident The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures should be corrected. The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not make any sudden steering movements when doing so. 232 i The operation of the tyre pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. i If you are carrying a deflated tyre in the vehicle, you may only reactivate the tyre pressure monitor if: Rthe deflated tyre is no longer in the vehicle Ryou have adjusted the tyre pressure correctly Calling up the tyre pressure using the on-board computer X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the j or k button to select the tyre pressure function. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will be displayed. If the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes or you have not driven faster than 25 km/h since the vehicle was parked, the following message appears: Tyre pressure displayed only after driving for a few minutes i The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a filling station with a pressure gauge. The tyres pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. The tyre pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ when the vehicle is at high altitude. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressures. Tyre pressure warning If the tyre pressure on one or more wheels drops significantly, a message appears in the multi-function display. The tyre pressure of the affected wheel(s) will be displayed in a red rectangle. You will also hear a warning tone. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 233 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Tyres and wheels Restarting the tyre pressure monitor In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values, e.g. if you have: Rchanged the tyre pressure Rchanged Rfitted the wheels or tyres new wheels or tyres If you wish to define the new reference values manually: X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set correctly in all four tyres for the current operating conditions. Also observe the notes in the section on tyre pressures (Y page 229). X X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The standard display appears in the multifunction display (Y page 125). Press the j or k button to select the Tyre pressure function or wait until the following message appears: Tyre pressure displayed only after driving for a few minutes * optional X Press the reset button on the left of the instrument cluster (Y page 243). The following message appears in the multi-function display: Check current tyre pressure? X Press the æ button. The following message appears in the multi-function display: Tyre pressure monitor restarted The tyre pressure monitor has stored the pressure of the tyres as a new reference value. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the ç button. Interchanging the wheels G Risk of accident Interchange the front and rear wheels only if they have the same dimensions: for example size, offset, etc. After every wheel interchange/change, have the tightening torque checked at a qualified specialist workshop that has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes- Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 130 Nm. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts of the correct size which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The wheels may be interchanged every 5,000 km to 10,000 km depending on the degree of tyre wear, provided that the vehicle has the same size front and rear tyres. Do not reverse the direction of tyre rotation. The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres differ depending on the operating conditions. Interchange the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tyres. The front tyres typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tyres in the centre. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor*. 233 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 234 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Winter driving ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor*, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tyre fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, as this could damage the electronic components. Always have the wheels interchanged/ changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Winter driving Points to remember Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, at the onset of winter. Winter tyres Use winter tyres at temperatures below +7 ° C and on snow or ice-covered roads. Only then can the effect of the ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC* driving systems be ensured in winter too. Use winter tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. G Risk of accident Winter tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced immediately. They are no longer suitable for winter use, can no longer provide sufficient grip. This could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Always observe the maximum permitted speed specified for the winter tyres you have fitted. If you fit winter tyres which have a 32 Only 234 lower maximum permitted speed than that of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. In such circumstances, you should also restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle using permanent Speedtronic 32 to the maximum permissible speed for winter tyres (Y page 154). Once you have fitted the winter tyres: X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 229). X Restart the tyre pressure monitor* (Y page 232). G Risk of accident If you fit the spare wheel* when driving with winter tyres, bear in mind that driving stability will be impaired owing to unstable cornering characteristics caused by the different tyres. You should therefore adapt your driving style and drive carefully. Have the spare wheel* replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends available for certain countries. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 235 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Winter driving that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Snow chains For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains which have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are of a corresponding standard of quality. ! Information about the use of snow chaincompatible AMG winter tyres is applicable for AMG tyres. Use of snow chains is only permissible with these tyres. If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains cannot be fitted to all wheel/ tyre combinations. with the manufacturer's installation instructions. ! If snow chains are fitted to the front wheels, they may come into contact with the bodywork and axle components when the vehicle is in motion and damage the tyre or the vehicle. On vehicles with AIRMATIC DC*, you must only drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been fitted (Y page 156). Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains fitted (Y page 60). This way you can allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Winter driving G Risk of accident Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You should drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking manoeuvres. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission*: shift the selector lever to N. X Try to bring the vehicle under control using corrective steering. RSnow chains must not be fitted to emergency spare wheels, e.g. the "Minispare" or collapsible emergency spare wheel. RAlways fit snow chains to both rear wheels, even on vehicles with 4MATIC*. Comply * optional Z 235 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 236 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Driving tips Driving tips Downhill gradients Rolling with the engine switched off On long and steep downhill stretches, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must shift to a lower gear in good time or, on vehicles with automatic transmission*, select shift range 1, 2 or 3. G Risk of accident Do not switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. There is no power assistance for the steering or the service brake when the engine is not running. Steering and braking require significantly more effort and you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result. Braking G Risk of accident Do not change down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. This could cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. G Risk of accident Make sure that other road users are not endangered by your braking. 236 i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, Speedtronic or Distronic*. This uses the braking effect of the engine and you will not have to brake to such an extent to maintain the same speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. Heavy and light loads If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. If the brakes have been used only moderately, you should occasionally test their effectiveness. To do this, brake more firmly from a higher speed. This improves the grip of the brakes. Wet roads If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period of time without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes, when braking for the first time. You must brake harder. You must therefore maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. Brake firmly after driving on a wet road. This way the brake discs will become warm, drying more quickly, which will protect them against corrosion. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 237 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Driving tips Limited braking performance on salted roads G Risk of accident The layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the braking effect, resulting in a significantly longer braking distance, which could lead to an accident. To avoid this danger, you should: Roccasionally brake carefully, without putting other road users at risk, when you are driving on salted roads. This helps to remove any salt that may have started to build up on the brake discs and the brake pads/linings. Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead and drive with particular care. Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a trip and immediately after commencing a new trip, so that salt residues are removed from the brake disc. New brake pads/linings For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings fitted to your vehicle that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. Because of this, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. G Risk of accident New brake pads/linings only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Before this optimum braking effect is reached, you should compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater pressure when braking. This also applies after the brake discs or the brake pads/linings have been replaced. High-performance brake system for AMG vehicles The high-performance brake system is designed for heavy loads. Braking can therefore cause noises. This will depend on: Rspeed Rbraking Tyre grip G Risk of accident Whereas the vehicle can be fully controlled at a certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the same road safety. Otherwise you could cause an accident. Pay particular attention to the road conditions at temperatures around freezing point. If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. from fog), a light film of water rapidly forms on the ice when you brake, considerably reducing tyre grip. Drive with particular care in such weather conditions. force Renvironmental conditions, such as temper- ature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings Z 237 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 238 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Driving abroad Driving on wet roads If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of aquaplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and brake carefully. Driving on flooded roads If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe maximum permitted still water depth is 25 cm. Ryou should drive no faster than at walking pace. ! Note that vehicles in front or oncoming vehicles create waves. This could mean that the maximum permitted water depth is exceeded. You must observe these notes, otherwise damage may occur to the engine, electrics or transmission. 238 Driving abroad Points to remember An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain the relevant workshop directories from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Only low-octane fuel is available in certain countries. You can find further information about fuel grades on (Y page 218). Do not change xenon headlamps yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Symmetrical dipped beam If your journey takes you to countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to the country in which the vehicle is registered, your headlamps must be switched to symmetrical dipped beam. Oncoming traffic will be dazzled less. G Risk of injury Vehicles with xenon headlamps*: Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured if you touch the electric contacts on xenon bulbs. Do not, therefore, remove the cover on xenon bulbs. 1 Protective cap X Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 239 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Trailer towing Trailer towing G Risk of accident Folding out the ball coupling Make sure that the ball coupling is fully engaged both when it is folded in and when it is folded out. The indicator lamp is not lit. Do not pull the telescopic lever if a trailer is attached. The trailer could otherwise come loose. Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle, you must fit the ball coupling. i In vehicles with a folding bench seat, first remove the folding bench seat cushion (Y page 86) and fold up the luggage compartment floor (Y page 195). 1 Switchover lever X Switch lever 1 over. X Replace the cap. The telescopic lever is under the boot/luggage compartment mat on the left-hand side. G Risk of accident Have your headlamps switched back to asymmetrical dipped beam if you visit a country in which traffic drives on the same side of the road as in the country in which your vehicle was registered. You may otherwise dazzle the oncoming traffic and could cause an accident. X Pull telescopic lever 1 out forwards. X Pull telescopic lever 1 upwards. The ball coupling disengages and folds out from under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The trailer power socket folds away automatically. X Guide telescopic lever 1 back again. 1 Telescopic lever 2 Indicator lamp Z 239 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 240 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Trailer towing X X Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow by hand until it engages in a vertical position. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The message Trailer tow hitch Check locking mech. is shown in the multi-function display until the ball coupling is engaged. Remove the protective cap from the ball coupling. Notes on towing a trailer G Risk of accident When reversing the vehicle towards the trailer, make sure there is nobody between the trailer and the vehicle. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: RThe permitted trailer drawbar noseweight RThe 240 permitted trailer load Bear in mind that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual noseweight. RThe permitted rear axle load of the towing vehicle RThe maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer You will find the applicable permissible values which must not be exceeded in the vehicle documents. You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle in the “Technical data” section. You will find installation dimensions and loads in the "Technical data" section (Y page 375). The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight on the ball coupling is 76 kg (Saloon) or 84 kg (Estate). However, the actual noseweight must not exceed the value given on the trailer coupling and trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies. ! Use a noseweight as close as possible to the maximum permissible noseweight. Do not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. i On vehicles without level control, the height of the ball coupling will alter according to the load placed on the vehicle. In this case, you should use a trailer with a heightadjustable drawbar. Coupling up a trailer G Risk of injury Do not connect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could become trapped between the bumper and drawbar. ! Do not uncouple a trailer with overrun brake between the bumper and drawbar, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged by the spring action of the overrun brake. X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle. X Couple up the trailer. X Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 241 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Trailer towing Driving tips In Germany, the maximum permitted speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is 80 km/h. ! A maximum speed of 80 km/h should not be exceeded, even in countries where higher speeds are permitted for vehicle/ trailer combinations. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability Rhas Ris an increased braking distance affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rconsumes more fuel On long and steep downhill gradients you must select a lower gear in good time, or in vehicles with automatic transmission*, select shift range 1, 2 or 3. i This also applies if you have activated cruise control, Distronic* or Speedtronic. * optional This uses the braking effect of the engine and you will not have to brake to such an extent to maintain the same speed. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously. G Risk of accident Never depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause the brakes to rub by applying constant slight pedal pressure. This causes the brake system to overheat, increases the braking distance and can lead to the brakes failing completely. Driving tips RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. and consequently the vehicle's gradientclimbing capability, decrease with increasing altitude. If the trailer swings from side to side: X Do not accelerate. X Do not counter-steer. X Brake if necessary. G Risk of accident On no account should you attempt to draw the vehicle/trailer combination out by increasing speed. Folding in the ball coupling i Fold in the ball coupling when you are not using the trailer tow hitch. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, Z 241 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 242 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Trailer towing Trailer power supply The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at the factory with a permanent power supply. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 9. ! You can connect accessories with a max- 1 Telescopic lever 2 Indicator lamp X Place the protective cap on the ball coupling. G Risk of injury Make sure that no persons or animals are in the pivoting range of the ball coupling. Otherwise, they could be injured. X Pull telescopic lever 1 out forwards. X Pull telescopic lever 1 upwards. The ball coupling disengages and folds down under the rear bumper. Indicator lamp 2 flashes. X Guide telescopic lever 1 back again. 242 X Press the ball coupling in the direction of the arrow by hand until it engages behind the bumper. Indicator lamp 2 goes out and the message in the multi-function display disappears. imum power consumption of 240 W to the permanent power supply. You must not charge a trailer battery using the power supply. You can obtain further information about installing the trailer electrics from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Trailer with 7-pin connector If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both of these can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 243 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Service Fitting the adapter Service Active Service System PLUS ASSYST PLUS, the Active Service System, tells you when the next service is due. Whenever a service is due, this is shown in the multi-function display: Service A due in .. days Service A due in .. km Service A due now to subtract the battery-disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Fading out the service message 1 Connector with lug 2 Socket with groove X Open the socket cover. X Insert the connector with lug 1 into groove 2 on the socket and turn the connector clockwise to the stop. X Make the cover engage. X If you are using an adapter cable, secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties. ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable play so that the cable cannot become detached when cornering. 1 Reset button X The letter indicates how much time the workshop will require to carry out the service work. The letters displayed range from A for a short service duration to H for a long service duration. ASSYST PLUS does not record any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. In order to maintain the time-dependent service schedule, you should call up the service due date and make a note of it before you disconnect the battery. The alternative is Press reset button 1. Z 243 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 244 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Care Exceeding the service due date One of the following messages appears in the multi-function display: Service A overdue by .. days Service A overdue by .. km You will also hear a warning tone. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the service indicator when it carries out the necessary service work. i If you fail to have the service performed by the specified date, you may be contravening the relevant laws, your warranty may be invalidated and ex gratia claims may be refused. Calling up the service due date Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Switch on the ignition. X Press è or ÿ to select the Basic display menu (Y page 125). X Press j or k to select the service information. The 9 service symbol and the service due date are displayed. X To select a different display, press j, è or ÿ. Care Notes on care Regular and proper care maintains the value of your vehicle. i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care products. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Repair damage caused by loose chippings and remove the following substances immediately, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard: RSoak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off afterwards. RSoak bird droppings with water and rinse off afterwards. RRemove tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. 244 RUse silicone remover to remove wax. RUse tar remover to remove tar stains. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 245 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Care H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging, cleaning cloths and polishing wads in an environmentally responsible manner. ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces, otherwise you could damage the paintwork. Vehicle care ! Do not park the vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, especially if the wheels have just been cleaned with a wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause rapid corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. After cleaning, park the vehicle when it is at normal operating temperature. Automatic car wash G Risk of accident The vehicle is braked when HOLD is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD before the vehicle is washed in an automatic car wash. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. ! Do not use a touch-free automatic car wash that uses chemical agents to wash the vehicle. Preferably use one with high-pressure jets for prewashing. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is suitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is washed. There is otherwise a risk of damage to the exterior mirrors. ! Make sure the side windows are com- pletely closed, the ventilation/heater blower is fully turned off and the windscreen wiper switch is set to 0. The rain sensor may otherwise be activated, for instance, leading to inadvertent wiper sweeps being triggered. This could cause damage to the vehicle. After using an automatic car wash, wipe any wax and drying agents off the windscreen and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windscreen. High-pressure cleaners G Risk of accident Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle or - especially - the tyres. You could otherwise damage the tyres and cause an accident. ! Observe the instructions issued by the equipment manufacturer concerning the distance to be maintained between the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the vehicle (at least 30 cm). Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor joint Relectrical Z components 245 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 246 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Care Rbattery ! Only fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen when they are in a vertical position, otherwise you will damage the bonnet. Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to failures or leaks. Cleaning the wiper blades and the outside of the windscreen G Risk of injury Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock before cleaning the windscreen or the wiper blades. There is otherwise a risk of the windscreen wipers being set in motion and causing injury. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 76). X Set the windscreen wipers to position u on the combination switch (Y page 105). X Turn the key to position 0 or remove it when the wiper arms are vertical (Y page 76). 246 X Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen until you feel them engage. X Clean the windscreen and the wiper blades. X Fold the windscreen wipers back again before the ignition is switched on. ! Do not clean the wiper blades too often, otherwise the rubber may become porous, resulting in wiper noise. Cleaning the windows ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Clean the insides of the windows with a damp cloth or commercially-available glass cleaner. Avoid touching the inside of the rear windscreen and the side windows with hard objects, e.g. ice scrapers or rings. You could otherwise cause damage to the windows, rear window heating or aerial on the rear window. i Anti-glare film retrofitted to the insides of the windows could interfere with radio or mobile phone reception, especially if it is conductive or metal-coated film. Information about anti-glare film can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Cleaning the headlamps X Clean the headlamp lenses with a wet sponge. ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Do not use the following: Rdry cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvent You could otherwise scratch or damage the surface of the lenses. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 247 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Care Plastic trim ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do not scrub. Doing so will scratch or damage the surfaces. X Wipe plastic parts with a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth). X Light soiling: use a low-foaming soap (e.g. a light liquid hand soap) diluted in water. X Heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent that is solvent-free and non-corrosive. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz cleaning product for this purpose. Cleaning the steering wheel boss and dashboard X Moisten a clean lint-free cloth with water. X Clean the plastic parts and the dashboard. X If particularly dirty, use a mild detergent. G Risk of injury Do not use cleaners and cockpit care sprays containing solvents to clean the cockpit and steering wheel boss. Cleaners containing solvents cause the surface to become porous and in the event of an air* optional bag being triggered, plastic parts that have become loose could cause considerable injuries. Leather upholstery* ! Cleaning RClean genuine leather covers using a damp cloth, then wipe the covers down using a dry cloth. When doing this, make sure that the leather does not become soaked. For leather care, you should use leather care foam A 001 986 59 71 10. You can purchase this from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e. g. washing up liquid). RClean fabric covers with a microfibre cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. washing up liquid). When cleaning, take care not to rub too vigorously and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Clean- ing results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean Alcantara covers with a damp cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. i Note that leather covers are a natural product and as such are subject to a natural ageing process and may react differently (e.g. increased formation of wrinkles) to certain environmental influences (such as high humidity, intense heat). Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the quality (both appearance and comfort) of the covers is retained over time. Care of exhaust tail pipes (AMG vehicles) Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. Regular care of the exhaust tail pipes will ensure that their original shine is restored. ! Do not clean exhaust tail pipes with alkaline-based cleaning agents such as wheel cleaner. 247 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 248 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Care Use the chrome cleaning agent recommended by Mercedes-Benz for cleaning. Information about chrome cleaning agents can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Cleaning Parktronic* The sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. Trailer coupling* The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded. X Remove any rust using a wire brush. X Cleaning Distronic* Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a highpressure cleaner. Do not use solvents. 1 Parktronic* sensors in the front bumper (left-hand side) X 1 Distronic* cover X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Clean cover 1 in the radiator grille with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do not scrub. Doing so will scratch or damage the surfaces. 248 Clean sensors 1 in the bumper with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or damage the sensors. If you intend to use a high-pressure cleaner or a steam cleaner to clean the sensors, observe the instructions issued by the equipment manufacturer concerning the distance to be maintained between the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the vehicle. 1 Ball neck head X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling 1. X Check that the vehicle's trailer coupling is working properly. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 249 Version: 2.9.4 Operation Care i Maintenance on the ball coupling and trailer coupling can also be performed by any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. H Environmental note Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an environmentally-responsible manner. Z 249 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 250 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 250 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 251 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Where will I find...? ........................... Display messages ............................. Troubleshooting ................................ Locking/unlocking in an emergency ................................................. Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints .................................. Changing the batteries ..................... Changing the bulbs ........................... Replacing the wiper blades .............. Flat tyre ............................................. Battery ............................................... Jump-starting .................................... Towing and tow-starting .................. Fuses .................................................. 252 257 282 306 309 310 311 315 317 329 333 337 340 251 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 252 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Where will I find...? Where will I find...? Estate Warning triangle The warning triangle is located in a red box behind the side trim panel on the left-hand side of the luggage compartment. Saloon The warning triangle is secured on the inside of the boot lid. 1 Warning triangle X 1 Release button 2 Side trim panel 1 Warning triangle X Turn the catch 90° in the direction of the arrow and remove warning triangle 1. 252 X Press release button 1. X Fold side trim 2 inwards. Remove warning triangle 1. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 253 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Where will I find...? Setting up the warning triangle First-aid kit i Check the expiry date of the first-aid kit annually, and replace the contents if necessary. Fire extinguisher* i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after each use and checked every two years. Otherwise, it may fail in an emergency. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. The first-aid kit is located in the stowage compartment under the front-passenger seat. The fire extinguisher is located in the stowage compartment underneath the driver's seat. 1 Retainer 2 Side reflectors 3 Feet X Fold feet 3 down and out to the side. X Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a triangle and lock them at the top using retainer 1. * optional 1 Handle X To open: pull handle 1 up. X Fold the cover forwards. X Remove the first-aid kit. 1 Handle 2 Cover X To open: pull handle 1 up. X Pull cover 2 forwards in the direction of the arrow. X Remove the fire extinguisher from the stowage compartment. 253 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 254 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Where will I find...? Vehicle tool kit, jack and spare wheel* The vehicle tool kit is located in a stowage compartment underneath the floor of the boot/luggage compartment. G Risk of injury The jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. If you are carrying out work on the vehicle, you must use stands. Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, non-slip and level surface. Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. Do not start the engine at any time while a wheel is being changed. Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being supported by the jack. If you do not raise the vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the boot lid/tailgate is opened or closed) and you could be seriously injured. 254 i When using the jack, you should also observe the safety notes in the "Flat tyre" section (Y page 324). Saloon X Fold up the boot floor (Y page 192). Estate X Open the luggage compartment floor (Y page 193). Vehicles with folding bench seat* X Open the luggage compartment floor (Y page 193). 1 Rotary catch 2 Cover X Turn rotary catch 1 clockwise to the stop and remove cover 2. i To reach the vehicle tool kit, the side cover must first be released. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 255 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Where will I find...? Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit Estate Saloon 1 Vehicle tool kit, jack, folding chock 2 Electric air pump 3 TIREFIT kit Vehicles with "Minispare" emergency spare wheel*/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or a spare wheel 1 Vehicle tool kit, jack, folding chock 2 Electric air pump 3 TIREFIT kit 1 Vehicle tool kit, wheel wrench, jack, fold- ing chock 2 "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/col- lapsible emergency spare wheel or spare wheel 3 Fastening element i Vehicles with collapsible emergency spare wheel: The electric air pump is under fastening element 3. Z * optional 255 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 256 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Where will I find...? Removing the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel*/collapsible emergency spare wheel or spare wheel* X Saloon: remove the luggage well (Y page 256). X Estate: remove the luggage compartment floor (Y page 194). X Turn fastening element 3 anti-clockwise. X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel/collapsible emergency spare wheel or the spare wheel 2. 2 Luggage well X To remove: unscrew securing clips 1 from the securing bolts by turning the clips anti-clockwise. X Lift up luggage well 2 in the area of securing clips 1. X Remove luggage well 2 from the boot. Setting up the foldable wheel chock The folding wheel chock serves as an additional measure for securing the vehicle against rolling away, e.g. when a wheel is being changed. Removing or fitting the luggage well You can only remove the luggage well from the Saloon. 1 To fold the plates upwards 2 To fold out the lower plate 3 To insert the plate X 1 Securing clips 256 To fit: insert the luggage well into the boot in such a way that securing clips 1 are roughly aligned with the securing bolts. X Press the front edge of the luggage well under the trim of the loading edge in the direction of the arrows. X Press securing clips 1 up to the stop against the securing bolts. X Fold both plates 1 upwards. X Fold out lower plate 2. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into openings in base plate 3. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 257 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Notes The on-board computer shows warnings or malfunctions in the multi-function display. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone or a continuous tone. The multi-function display shows high-priority display messages in red. In the following tables, these display messages are printed in red. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Owner's Manual. G Risk of accident No further messages can be displayed if the instrument cluster and/or the multi-function display fails. This means that you will not see information about the driving situation, such as the speed, outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, display messages or system failures. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. Adjust your driving style and speed accordingly. Immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the instructions provided for HOLD (Y page 155) and parking (Y page 113). The following tables contain all the display messages. Hiding display messages After a few seconds, the on-board computer automatically hides some low priority display messages. Other messages remain visible in the multi-function display until you hide them yourself. Some high priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multi-function display shows these messages continuously until the causes of the messages have been remedied. Use the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. X Use the è, ·, j or k button to select another display. The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory (Y page 131). Z 257 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 258 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Text messages G Risk of accident and injury The operating safety of the vehicle could be impaired if service work is carried out incorrectly. There is a risk that you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. The safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 120 km/h Maximum speed exceeded ABS ABS, ESP inoperative See Owner's Manual 33 Only 258 for certain countries. Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The maximum speed has been exceeded33. X Drive more slowly. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident ABS, ESP® and therefore also PRESAFE® are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS has also been deactivated. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 259 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages ABS Possible cause/consequence ABS, ESP unavailable See Owner's Manual Possible solution X Drive on carefully. ABS, ESP® and therefore also PRESAFE® are unavailable due to undervoltage. BAS has also been deactivated. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident DISTRONIC Override Distronic* is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Ease off the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC - - - An activation condition for Distronic* is not fulfilled. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed (Y page 145). or DISTRONIC inoperative Distronic* is faulty. X Check activation conditions for Distronic*. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z * optional 259 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 260 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages DISTRONIC Possible cause/consequence currently unavailable See Owner's Manual Distronic* is deactivated and is tempora- Distronic* is available again and the display mesrily inoperative, if: sage disappears when the dirt (e.g. slush) falls off while you are driving or if the system detects that Rthe Distronic* cover in the radiator the sensors are fully available again. grille is dirty If the display message does not disappear: Rits function is impaired due to heavy X Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille rain, snow or fog. (Y page 248). Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily X If necessary, wait until the system has cooled unavailable, e.g. because of electrodown. magnetic radiation. X Restart the engine. Rthe radar sensor system has not detected any vehicles or stationary objects, e.g. traffic signs, for a long time. Rthe ESP 260 inoperative See Owner's Manual Possible solution system has overheated. G Risk of accident ESP® and therefore also Brake Assist and PRE-SAFE® are unavailable due to a malfunction. The v warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 261 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages P Selector lever in park position Possible cause/consequence Possible solution You have switched off the engine with the KEYLESS GO button* and opened the driver's door. or With HOLD activated, you have either: X Move the selector lever to P. The engine can be started again. You have tried to switch off the engine with the KEYLESS GO button* while the selector lever is in position R or D. X Move the selector lever to P. You have attempted to start the engine while the selector lever is not in position P or N. X Move the selector lever to P or N. Ropened the driver’s door and released the seat belt or Rswitched Ropened off the engine or the bonnet The horn may also sound at regular intervals. The horn becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The engine cannot be started. P Selector lever in park position Please shift to P or N Z * optional 261 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 262 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages PRE-SAFE Possible cause/consequence inoperative See Owner's Manual G Risk of injury Possible solution X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE® has failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available. Tyre pressure displayed only The tyre pressure monitor* is measuring after driving for a the tyre pressure. few minutes X Drive on. The tyre pressures will appear in the multifunction display after you have been driving for a few minutes. Please correct the tyre pressure Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*: the pressure of one or more tyres is too low or the tyre pressures of the individual wheels display a large discrepancy. X Check the tyre pressure at the next opportunity and correct it if necessary (Y page 229). Tyre pressure monitor inoperative The tyre pressure monitor* is malfunctioning. X Have the tyre pressure monitor* and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No wheel sensors The tyre pressure monitor* is deactivated because the vehicle is fitted with wheels that do not have suitable wheel sensors. X Have wheels with suitable wheel sensors fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. Once wheels with the correct wheel sensors have been fitted, the tyre pressure monitor* reactivates automatically after a few minutes of driving. 262 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 263 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Tyre press. mon. Wheel sensor missing The tyre pressure monitor* is not receiving a signal from at least one wheel because a wheel has been fitted which does not have suitable sensors (e.g. the spare wheel). Or there is a malfunction in at least one wheel sensor. A line is displayed in the multi-function display for the tyre concerned instead of the tyre pressure value. X Have the tyre pressure monitor* and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Once wheels with suitable wheel sensors have been fitted again, the tyre pressures are displayed in the multi-function display after driving for a few minutes. Tyre pressure monitor currently unavailable The tyre pressure monitor* is temporarily deactivated. The voltage of the vehicle's electrical system is too low or radio interference prevents the reception of sensor signals. X Drive on. Once the causes have been eliminated, the tyre pressure monitor* automatically reactivates after a few minutes of driving. Z * optional 263 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 264 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Tyre pressure Possible cause/consequence Check tyres G Risk of accident The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a significant pressure loss. Possible solution X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Check the tyres. X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 229). X Repair or change the faulty wheel as necessary (Y page 317). X Then restart the tyre pressure loss warning system once the tyre pressure is correct (Y page 230). Run Flat Indicator inoperative The tyre pressure loss warning system is deactivated due to a malfunction. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check tyres, then restart Run Flat Indicator There was a tyre pressure warning message. X Make sure that the pressure set is correct for all tyres (Y page 229). X Then restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (Y page 230). X Reactivate HOLD later. HOLD 264 off HOLD has been deactivated. The vehicle is skidding or a condition for activating SBC HOLD is no longer met when the brake pedal is firmly depressed. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 265 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages HOLD HOLD cannot be activated See Owner's Manual inoperative See Owner's Manual Cruise control inoperative and SPEEDTRONIC SRS Cruise control Restraint system malfunction Consult workshop - - - Possible cause/consequence Possible solution A condition for activating HOLD has not been met. Check the conditions for activating HOLD (Y page 155). X Close the bonnet. X Close the driver's door. X Start the engine. X Release the parking brake. X Switch off all consumers that are not required. HOLD can be reactivated as soon as the onboard voltage is sufficient. A malfunction has occurred. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Speedtronic and cruise control or Distronic* are not operational. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Activate ESP® (Y page 60) X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store the speed (Y page 143). G Risk of injury The restraint systems are faulty. A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. Z * optional 265 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 266 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Symbol messages G Risk of accident and injury The operating safety of the vehicle could be impaired if service work is carried out incorrectly. There is a risk that you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. The safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution # The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are: X Stop immediately and safely when traffic conditions allow and check the poly-V-belt. Ra faulty alternator X Ra torn poly-V-belt If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Ra malfunction in the electronics X If it is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. & Estate: the tailgate is open. X Close the tailgate. Ê Saloon: the boot lid is open. X Close the boot lid. 266 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 267 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Y G Risk of accident Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system*: you are driving with the bonnet open. Possible solution X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Close the bonnet. V At least one door is open. The display symbol shows you which doors are open. X Close the doors. D The cooling fan for the coolant is faulty. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the engine (e.g. driving in mountainous terrain) and stopand-go driving. X Do not pull away. X Wait until the display message disappears. The vehicle has reached the level required for driving. @ Vehicle rising Vehicles with AIRMATIC Dual Control*: your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. @ Vehicle rising Please wait Vehicles with AIRMATIC Dual Control*: the vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. Z * optional 267 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 268 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages @ Possible cause/consequence STOP Car too low G Risk of accident wing or the tyres could be damaged when you drive on. Listen for scraping sounds. X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Pull over and select a higher vehicle level. The vehicle may be raised, depending on the type of fault. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The AIRMATIC Dual Control* function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Allow the ball coupling to engage in the end position (Y page 239). X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction \ Trailer tow hitch Check lock mechanism The trailer tow hitch* is not correctly engaged. Brake wear The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. 268 ! Avoid large steering angles, otherwise the AIRMATIC Dual Control* is faulty. @ 2 Possible solution * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 269 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages 3 Brake immediately Possible cause/consequence Possible solution A malfunction occurred with HOLD activated. or Vehicles with manual transmission: with HOLD activated, you have either: X Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message in the multi-function display disappears. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (Y page 113). The engine can be started again. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Ropened the driver’s door and released the seat belt or Rswitched Ropened off the engine or the bonnet The horn may also sound at regular intervals. The horn becomes louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle. The engine cannot be started. 3 EBV, ABS, ESP inop- G Risk of accident erative See OwnEBV, ABS and ESP® are unavailable due to er's Manual a malfunction. BAS has also been deactivated. PRE-SAFE® is therefore also not operational. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect. Z 269 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 270 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages 3 Possible cause/consequence Check brake fluid level G Risk of accident There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Possible solution X Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. X Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the malfunction. ! Release parking brake You are driving with the parking brake applied. X Release the parking brake. ? Rear left backrest not locked or Rear right backrest not locked The left or right rear seat backrest is not engaged. X Fully engage the rear seat backrest (Y page 198). [ Clean fuel filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 270 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 271 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages D D Coolant Stop vehicle, turn engine off Coolant Stop vehicle, turn engine off Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The coolant is too hot. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Switch off the engine. X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the engine. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. X Observe the coolant temperature gauge. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Switch off the engine. X Check the poly-V-belt. X If it is not damaged: do not start the engine again until the display message goes out. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. X If it has torn: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The poly-V-belt may have torn. Z 271 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 272 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages B Top up coolant See Owner's Manual Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The coolant level is too low. X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 225). X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual. . Left-hand cornering light or Right-hand cornering light The left-hand and/or right-hand cornering lamp* is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Dipped beam, left or Dipped beam, right The right-hand or left-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty. X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 311). X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Left-hand trailer turn signal or Right-hand trailer turn signal The left-hand or right-hand trailer turn signal is faulty. X Replace the bulb. . Trailer brake lamp The trailer brake lamp is faulty. X Replace the bulb. 272 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 273 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Trailer Left-hand tail lamp or Trailer Right-hand tail lamp The left-hand or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty. X Replace the bulb. . AUTO lights inoperative The light sensor is faulty. Constant headlamp mode is switched on. X Switch the lights to manual control in the onboard computer (Y page 135). X Switch the lights on and off using the light switch. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Rear left turn sig- The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn nal Back-up bulb on signal is faulty. or Rear right turn signal Back-up bulb on . Turn signal in left-hand mirror or Turn signal in right-hand mirror The turn signal lamp on the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is faulty. This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Z 273 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 274 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Front left turn signal Back-up bulb on or Front right turn signal Back-up bulb on The front left-hand or right-hand turn signal is faulty. X Replace the bulb (Y page 311). . 3rd brake lamp The third brake lamp is faulty. This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Left brake-/tail lamp Back-up bulb on or Right brake-/tail lamp Back-up bulb on The left-hand or right-hand rear brake lamp is faulty. This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.* X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Main beam, left or Main beam, right The left-hand or right-hand main-beam headlamp is faulty. X Replace the bulb (Y page 311). . Intell. Light System inoperative The Intelligent Light System* is faulty. The lights remain available without the Intelligent Light System*. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 274 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 275 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Left-hand licence plate lamp or Right-hand licence plate lamp The left-hand or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty. X Replace the bulb (Y page 311). . Switch off lights You did not switch off the lights when leaving the vehicle. X Turn the light switch to M or U. or X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to the stop. . Front left-hand foglamp or Front right-hand foglamp The front left-hand or right-hand foglamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Rear left-hand foglamp or Rear right-hand foglamp The left-hand or right-hand rear foglamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 275 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 276 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Front left-hand parking lamp Backup bulb on or Front right-hand parking lamp Backup bulb on The front left-hand or right-hand parking lamp is faulty. X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 311). X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Left-hand reversing lamp or Right-hand reversing lamp The left-hand or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . Left-hand tail lamp Back-up bulb on or Right-hand tail lamp Back-up bulb on The left-hand or right-hand tail lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ò Replace air cleaner The engine air filter must be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. . 276 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 277 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages N N N Check engine oil level when next refuelling Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level. X Check the engine oil level (Y page 223) and top up the engine oil if necessary. X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. X Check the engine oil level (Y page 223) and top up the engine oil if necessary. X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs topping up more often than usual. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Switch off the engine. X Top up the engine oil and check the level (Y page 223). Add 1 litre engine The engine oil level is too low. oil when next refuelling Engine oil level Stop vehicle, turn engine off There is insufficient oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage. N Engine oil level Reduce oil level You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter. X Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the specified level. Observe the legal requirements. N Cannot measure engine oil level The measuring system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 277 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 278 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages ± Display malfunction Consult workshop Possible cause/consequence Possible solution One or more electronic systems are unable to deliver information to the onboard computer. The following systems may have failed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Repair or change the tyre (Y page 317). RCoolant RRev counter RCruise H 278 Tyre pressure Caution Tyre defect temperature gauge control or Speedtronic display G Risk of accident One or more tyres is losing air rapidly. The affected wheel is highlighted in the tyre pressure display of the tyre pressure monitor*. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 279 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages H Tyre pressure Check tyres Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The affected wheel is highlighted in the tyre pressure display of the tyre pressure monitor*. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Check the tyres. X Repair or change the faulty tyre if necessary (Y page 317). X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary (Y page 229). The warning will disappear automatically after you have been driving for a few minutes with the corrected tyre pressure. I Change key batteries The batteries of the KEYLESS GO key* are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 310). I Key not detected The KEYLESS GO key* is not in the vehicle. It will no longer be possible to centrally lock the vehicle and start the engine if the engine is switched off. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Look for the KEYLESS GO key*. The KEYLESS GO* key is not detected while the engine is running, because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. X Stop the vehicle. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Operate the vehicle using the key in the ignition lock if necessary. I Key not detected Z * optional 279 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 280 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages I Key not detected Possible cause/consequence Possible solution The KEYLESS GO key* cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the KEYLESS GO key* within the vehicle. X Operate the vehicle using the key in the ignition lock if necessary. I Key still in vehicle The KEYLESS GO key* was detected inside the vehicle during locking. X Remove the KEYLESS GO key* from the vehicle. I Please replace key The key no longer functions. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X inoperative Battery weak The battery voltage is insufficient. The auxiliary heating/ventilation* has switched off or cannot be switched on. X Drive for a longer distance. The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating/ventilation* is reactivated as soon as there is sufficient battery voltage. X inoperative Refuel There is insufficient fuel in the fuel tank. The auxiliary heating* cannot be switched on. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X inoperative See Owner's Manual The auxiliary heating* has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down: try to switch on the auxiliary heating* four times, waiting for several minutes between each attempt. X If the auxiliary heating* does not switch on: visit a qualified specialist workshop. 280 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 281 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Display messages Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution ¿ There is only a small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. W Reserve fuel level The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. The operation of the auxiliary heating* can no longer be guaranteed. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. t Enter PIN: You have not yet logged on to your mobile phone*. X Enter the PIN for the SIM card. t Bluetooth ready The Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the audio system or COMAND APS* is not activated. X The Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the audio system or COMAND APS* is not activated, see separate operating instructions. t No telephone inserted Your mobile phone is not inserted in the bracket*. X Insert mobile phone into the bracket* (Y page 211). W Top up washer fluid The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Top up the washer fluid (Y page 226). Z * optional 281 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 282 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Points to remember G Risk of accident and injury The operating safety of the vehicle could be impaired if service work is carried out incorrectly. There is a risk that you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. The safety systems may no longer be able to protect you or others as they are designed to do. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Indicator and warning lamps in switches and buttons Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions One or all of the indicator lamps There is insufficient voltage in the seat ventilation* button are because too many consumers are switched on. The seat ventilaflashing. tion* has switched itself off automatically. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting, etc. The seat ventilation* will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage again. One or all of the indicator lamps in the seat heating* button are flashing. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting, etc. The seat heating* will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage again. 282 There is insufficient voltage because too many consumers are switched on. The seat heating* has switched itself off automatically. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 283 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The steering wheel heating* indi- There is insufficient voltage cator lamp on the lower left lever because too many consumers are of the steering column is flashing. switched on. The steering wheel heating* has switched itself off automatically. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting, etc. The steering wheel heating* will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage again. The indicator lamp in the 2 Cooling has been deactivated button on the Thermatic/4-zone due to a malfunction. Thermotronic* control panel flashes three times when you press the button. The cooling system cannot be switched on. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The indicator lamp in the ¯ There is insufficient voltage because too many consumers are rear-window heating button is flashing. The rear-window heat- switched on. ing has switched itself off prematurely or cannot be switched on. X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting, etc. The rear-window heating will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage again. Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat*: The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the centre console is lit. A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat recognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The frontpassenger airbag has therefore been disabled. Z * optional 283 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 284 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition on the frontpassenger seat*: The 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the centre console is lit. Possible cause/consequence G Risk of injury There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. The automatic child seat recognition* is malfunctioning. Suggested solutions X RMobile RCards phones with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes If the 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is still lit: X 284 Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, e.g.: RNotebooks Visit a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 285 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster Problem - The yellow ABS warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions X Drive on carefully. ABS is unavailable due to a malfunction. Therefore, Brake Assist, ESP®, EBV and PRE-SAFE® are, for example, also deactivated. The brake system continues to function normally, but without electronic support. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 257). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. v The yellow ESP® warning G Risk of accident lamp is lit while the engine ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will is running. not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. X Reactivate ESP® (Y page 60). Exceptions: (Y page 60). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. v The yellow ESP® warning G Risk of accident lamp is lit while the engine ESP® is unavailable due to a malis running. function. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 258). X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident Z 285 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 286 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem v The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. 3 The red brake system warning lamp comes on while you are driving. You will also hear a warning tone. 3 The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. You will also hear a warning tone. l The red distance warning lamp* lights up while the vehicle is in motion. 286 Possible cause/consequence G Risk of accident ESP® or traction control has intervened because at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or Distronic* is deactivated. You are driving with the parking brake applied. G Risk of accident There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir. G Risk of accident Suggested solutions X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Release the accelerator pedal while you are driving. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. Exceptions: (Y page 60). X Release the parking brake. The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. X Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 257). X Under no circumstances should you top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault. X Increase the distance. The distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the speed selected. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 287 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem l The red distance warning lamp* lights up while the vehicle is in motion. You will also hear a warning tone. D The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. D The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions X Be prepared to brake immediately. You are approaching a vehicle in front at too great a speed or Distronic* has detected a stationary obstacle in your line of travel. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. There is insufficient coolant in the expansion tank. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool. X Check the coolant level. Observe the warning notes (Y page 225). Top up the coolant if necessary. X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X In doing so, avoid heavy loads on the engine (e.g. driving in mountainous terrain) and stop-and-go driving. G Risk of accident If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. Z * optional 287 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 288 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions D The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. You will also hear a warning tone. The coolant level is too low. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Allow the engine and coolant to cool. X Check the coolant level. Observe the warning notes (Y page 225). Top up the coolant if necessary. X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual. If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant temperature has exceeded 120 †. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. X Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ± The yellow engine diagnos- Vehicles with a diesel engine: the tics warning lamp comes fuel tank has run dry. on while the engine is running. X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling. Emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be checked. D The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. You will also hear a warning tone. 288 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 289 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence ± The yellow engine diagnos- There may be a malfunction: tics warning lamp comes Rin the fuel injection system on while the engine is runRin the exhaust system ning. Rin the ignition system (on vehicles with a petrol engine) Suggested solutions X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (Y page 257). The warning light will go out after the flat tyre has been changed and you have been driving for a few minutes. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode. H The yellow tyre pressure monitor* warning lamp is on. G Risk of accident The tyre pressure monitor* has detected a sudden or significant pressure loss in at least one of the tyres. 1 The red SRS warning lamp G Risk of injury is lit while the engine is The restraint systems are faulty. running. The airbags or belt tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not be triggered at all. Z * optional 289 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 290 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions < The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after the engine starts up34. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 95). < After the engine starts you G Risk of injury will hear a warning tone for The driver's seat belt is not fasup to 6 seconds34. tened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 95). The warning tone ceases. < The red seat belt warning G Risk of injury lamp lights up after startThe driver or front passenger has ing the engine, as soon as not fastened their seat belt. the driver's door or the front-passenger door is G Risk of injury closed. There are objects on the frontpassenger seat. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 95). The warning lamp goes out. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them safely. The warning lamp goes out. 34 Only 290 for certain countries. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 291 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence < The red seat belt warning G Risk of injury lamp flashes and you hear The driver or front passenger has an intermittent warning not fastened their seat belt and tone. you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have driven faster than 25 km/h for a short time. G Risk of injury Suggested solutions X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 95). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them safely. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. There are objects on the frontpassenger seat and you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have driven faster than 25 km/h for a short time. W The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. The operation of the auxiliary heating* can no longer be guaranteed. Z * optional 291 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 292 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Warning tones Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The anti-theft warning alarm* is triggered. You have opened the vehicle using the emergency key element without deactivating the antitheft alarm system* first. X Switch off the alarm (Y page 62). You hear a warning tone. A message appears in the multifunction display. X See the explanations for the display message (Y page 257). You hear a warning tone. You are driving with the parking brake applied. X Release the parking brake. You hear a warning tone. You did not switch off the lights when leaving the vehicle. X Turn the light switch to M or U. You hear a warning tone. G Risk of injury or X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to the stop. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 95). X Deactivate HOLD (Y page 155). The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. You hear a continuous tone. 292 You have switched off the engine and opened the bonnet or the driver's door with HOLD activated. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 293 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Accident Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. Possible cause/consequence G Risk of fire Suggested solutions X Switch off the ignition immediately. Remove the ignition key. The fuel line or the fuel tank has been damaged. The leaking fuel Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. The leaking fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion. creates a risk of fire or explosion. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X You are unable to determine the extent of the damage. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. You cannot detect any damage. X Start the engine as normal. X Reset the NECK-PRO head restraints (Y page 309). The NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver's and frontpassenger seats have been triggered. Your vehicle has been involved in a rear-end collision. Z 293 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 294 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Fuel and fuel tank Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. Possible cause/consequence X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately and remove it. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap is not released. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 306). The opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Refuel the vehicle. X Switch on the ignition for approximately 10 seconds (key in position 2 in the ignition lock). X Start the engine continuously for up to 40 seconds until it runs smoothly. The fuel system is now free of air. G Risk of explosion or fire The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. Suggested solutions The fuel tank of a vehicle with a There is air in the fuel system. diesel engine has been run completely dry. If the engine does not start: X Wait two minutes. X Repeat the starting procedure for up to 40 seconds. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 294 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 295 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Engine Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The engine will not start. HOLD is activated. X Deactivating HOLD (Y page 155). X Start the engine again. RThere X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before the next starting attempt. RThere X Try to start the engine again (Y page 110). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drain the battery. The engine will not start. You can hear the starter motor operating. is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a diesel engine: The fuel tank has been run dry. The engine will not start. You can hear the starter motor operating. The reserve fuel warning lamp is on and the fuel gauge shows 0. X Refuel the vehicle. X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 294). The engine will not start. You can- The on-board voltage is too low X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 333). not hear the starter motor oper- because the starter battery is too If the engine does not start despite attempting to jump-start it: ating. weak or discharged. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 295 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 296 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions Vehicles with a petrol engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical component of the engine control unit. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. A coolant temperature of over 120 °C is displayed. The coolant warning lamp may also be on and a warning tone may sound (Y page 120). The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 225). Observe the warning notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary. If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 °C, you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on mountain roads and stop/start driving. 296 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 297 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Automatic transmission* Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability is deteriorating. The transmission no longer changes gear. The transmission is in emergency mode. It is only possible to shift into 2nd gear and reverse gear. X Stop the vehicle. X Move the selector lever to P. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine. X Move the selector lever to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into 2nd gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z * optional 297 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 298 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Parktronic* Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions Only the red segments in the Parktronic has malfunctioned Parktronic warning display are lit. and has switched itself off. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. Parktronic is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic button lights up. X If problems persist, have Parktronic checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Only the red segments in the The Parktronic sensors are dirty Parktronic warning display are lit. or there is interference. Parktronic is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds. X Clean the Parktronic sensors (Y page 248). X Switch the ignition back on. Only the red segments in the The problem may be caused by an Parktronic warning display are lit. external source of radio or ultraParktronic is deactivated after sound waves. approximately 20 seconds. X See if Parktronic functions in a different location. 298 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 299 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Headlamps and turn signals Problem Possible cause/consequence The headlamps or the turn signals Air humidity is very high. in the exterior mirrors are misted up on the inside. The headlamp housing is not sealed and moisture has been able to enter. Suggested solutions X Drive with the headlamps switched on. The headlamps are demisted after a short distance. X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen wipers Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The windscreen wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers back on. The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The windscreen wipers fail completely. Z 299 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 300 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Windows Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions A side window will not close. An object has become trapped between the window and the door frame. X Remove the object(s). X Close the side window. There are objects in the window guide rail which are preventing the window from being raised. X Remove the objects. X Close the side window. You cannot see the cause. X Close the side window with increased force or without the antientrapment feature (Y page 108). Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions Mirrors Problem An exterior mirror has been pushed out of position. Vehicles with exterior mirrors that cannot be folded in/out electrically: X Push the mirror into the correct position manually. Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors*: X 300 Press the mirror-folding button* (Y page 91) repeatedly until you hear a distinct click. The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the mirror as usual (Y page 91). * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 301 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Key Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the key. The key batteries are discharged or nearly discharged. X To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again. If this does not work: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 306). X Check the key batteries (Y page 310) and replace them if necessary (Y page 310). X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 306). X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The battery charge indicator lamp The key batteries are discharged. of the key does not go on during the test. X Change the batteries (Y page 310). You have lost a key. X Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. The key is faulty. You have lost the emergency key element. Z 301 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 302 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The key cannot be turned in the ignition lock. The key has been in position 0 for a considerable time. X Remove the key and reinsert it into the ignition lock. X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary (Y page 329). X Start the engine. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating* or interior lighting, and try to turn the key again. The on-board voltage is too low. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and recharge it if necessary (Y page 329). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 333). or X 302 Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 303 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting KEYLESS GO* Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the KEYLESS GO key. The KEYLESS GO key batteries are discharged or nearly discharged. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again. If this does not work: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 306). X Check the KEYLESS GO key batteries (Y page 310) and replace them if necessary (Y page 310). X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the key. To do this, point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close range and try to open the vehicle again. X Have the KEYLESS GO key checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element (Y page 306). The KEYLESS GO key batteries are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 310). There is a fault with KEYLESS GO. The battery check lamp in the KEYLESS GO key does not light up when tested. Z * optional 303 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 304 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The vehicle cannot be started A door is open. The key therefore using the KEYLESS GO key and cannot be detected so easily. the KEYLESS GO button. The KEYYou did not depress the brake LESS GO key is in the vehicle. when starting the engine. X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. X Depress the brake and press the KEYLESS GO button. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle using the KEYLESS GO key in the ignition lock. X Have the KEYLESS GO key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. You have lost the KEYLESS GO key. Auxiliary heating* Problem Possible cause/consequence The auxiliary heating is not work- The fuel level is down to the ing. reserve level. 304 Suggested solutions X Refuel at the nearest filling station. The battery is not sufficiently charged. X Charge the battery. The auxiliary heating is faulty. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 305 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Troubleshooting Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions The auxiliary heating cannot be switched on or off using the remote control. The remote control display shows FAIL and the ¢ symbol. The signal transmission between the remote control and the vehicle is faulty. X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary. X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or off using the remote control. The remote control display shows FAIL and the ¡ symbol. There is not enough fuel in the tank, or the auxiliary heating is faulty. X Refuel at the nearest filling station. X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Possible cause/consequence Suggested solutions Parking up the vehicle Problem The vehicle is to be left parked up Damage resulting from non-use for longer than six weeks. may occur if the vehicle is parked up for long periods. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. X Disconnect the battery (Y page 331). Z 305 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 306 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Locking/unlocking in an emergency Locking/unlocking in an emergency Emergency key Releasing and removing the emergency key element If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked or locked with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*, use the emergency key element. If you use the emergency key element to unlock and open the driver's door or the boot lid (Saloon), the anti-theft alarm system* will be triggered (Y page 62). There are several ways to turn off the alarm: X Press the k or j button on the key. or X Insert the key into the ignition lock. or X or X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS GO*. The KEYLESS GO key* must be outside the vehicle. If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked centrally with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*: X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 306). 1 Release catch 2 Emergency key element X Press the KEYLESS GO button* on the selector lever. The KEYLESS GO key* must be in the vehicle. Unlocking the vehicle Push release catch 1 in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove emergency key element 2 from the key. $ To unlock X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise to position $. The door is unlocked. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the emergency key element clockwise. X 306 Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 307 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Locking/unlocking in an emergency Locking the vehicle If the vehicle can no longer be locked centrally with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*: X Open the driver's door. X Insert the emergency key element into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the emergency key element clockwise as far as it will go to position $. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the boot lid/tailgate. i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the X Press the locking button (Y page 70). X X Check whether the locking knobs on the doors are still visible. Press the locking knobs down manually if necessary. Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. X Check whether the doors and the boot lid/ tailgate are locked. X Close the driver's door. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 306). emergency key element anti-clockwise. Opening/closing the boot To unlock the boot Boot lock $ To unlock the boot X Insert the emergency key element fully into the boot lock. X Turn the emergency key element anticlockwise as far as it will go to position $ and pull the boot lid handle. The boot is unlocked. X Turn the emergency key element back and remove it. ! The boot lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is enough space above the boot lid. If the boot can no longer be unlocked with the key or the KEYLESS GO key*: X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 306). $ To lock Z * optional 307 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 308 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Locking/unlocking in an emergency Opening the boot manually (remote boot lid closing feature*) Opening the tailgate If the tailgate cannot be opened, use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate. i On vehicles with a folding bench seat* you can use the handle to open the tailgate from the inside (Y page 72). To close the boot lid 1 Recess To open the boot lid 1 Handle X Lift the boot lid by handle 1. Closing the boot manually (remote boot lid closing feature*) G Risk of injury Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the boot lid. i Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out. 308 X Pull the boot lid down using recess 1. X If necessary, close the boot lid from the outside by pushing down the edge. 1 Release catch 2 Release catch cover ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 309 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints X Pull cover 2 off the tailgate trim. X X Push release catch 1 to the left as far as the stop and open the tailgate. Hold the cover open at an angle of approximately 45 °. X Insert a screwdriver or similar implement 1 into the opening. X Press implement 1 downwards and simultaneously move the selector lever out of position P. X Remove implement 1. The selector lever can now be moved freely until it is returned to position P. Releasing the parking lock manually In the event of an electrical fault, it is possible to release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P, e.g. if you wish to tow the vehicle away. Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints If the NECK-PRO head restraints are triggered in an accident, you must reset the head restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats. Otherwise, the additional protection will not be available in the event of another rear-end collision. You can recognise when head restraints have been triggered by the fact that they have moved forwards and can no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have NECK-PRO head restraints checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre, following a rear-end collision. i If you have problems resetting the head restraints, have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Releasing the parking lock manually 1 Screwdriver or similar implement X Open the stowage compartment in the centre console. X Remove cup holder*. Z * optional 309 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 310 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Changing the batteries Changing the batteries Notes It is advisable to have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of poisoning 1 Resetting tool 2 To press back head restraint cushion 3 Guide X Take resetting tool 1 out of the glove compartment. X Insert resetting tool 1 into guide 3 between the head restraint cushion and the rear head restraint cover. X Press resetting tool 1 downwards until you hear the head restraint deployment mechanism engage. X Pull out resetting tool 1. X Firmly press back head restraint cushion 2 until it engages. X Repeat this procedure for the second head restraint. 310 Batteries contain toxic and caustic substances. For this reason, keep batteries away from children. If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor immediately. Key or KEYLESS GO key* Checking the batteries X Press the j or k button. The batteries are in order if the battery charge indicator lamp lights up briefly. Changing the batteries You require two CR 2025 3 V cell batteries. X Remove the emergency key element from the key (Y page 306). H Environmental note Do not dispose of batteries with the household rubbish. They contain highly toxic substances. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or to a special collection point for old batteries. 1 Emergency key element 2 Battery tray * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 311 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Changing the bulbs X X Insert emergency key element 1 into the opening in the key and push in the direction of the arrow. Battery tray 2 is released. Auxiliary heating* remote control One 6V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is required. Pull battery tray 2 out of the key. Changing the bulbs Notes on changing bulbs Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that all bulbs function correctly at all times. G Risk of injury 1 Battery 2 Battery cover 1 Batteries X X Remove old batteries 1 from the battery tray. Insert the new batteries beneath the contact spring with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Prise apart the side arms of battery cover 2 and slide off battery cover 2. X Remove old battery 1. X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity signs on the back of the remote control when doing so. X Push the battery tray back into the key housing until the battery tray engages. X X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle. Slide battery cover 2 back onto the remote control. X Use the remote control to check the vehicle's auxiliary heating functions. * optional Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should therefore allow them to cool down before you change them. Otherwise, you could be burned if you touch them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Otherwise, they could damage them, for example, and injure themselves. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Such a bulb may explode and injure you. H7 bulbs are pressurised and could explode when you change them, particularly if they are very hot. You should therefore wear eye protection and gloves when you are changing them. G Risk of injury Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You could get an electric shock and be seriously or even fatally injured if you touch the electric contacts on xenon bulbs. Do not, therefore, remove the cover on xenon bulbs. 311 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 312 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not change the LEDs yourself. You could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehicle. Overview G Risk of injury HiP bulbs are pressurised and may explode when you change them, thereby injuring you. Do not change HiP bulbs yourself; have them replaced at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 312 Estate Saloon Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 313 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Front bulbs Rear bulbs Bulb Type 1 Additional turn signal lamp LEDs35 2 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W 3 Dipped-beam headlamp 4 Main-beam headlamp Bulb Type 6 Third brake lamp LED35 7 Rear foglamp HiP35 Side lamp/park- HiP35 ing lamp Reversing lamp HiP35 H7 55 W Brake lamp HiP35 or LED*35 Front foglamp H11 55 Turn signal lamp HiP35 W35 8 Licence plate lamp You can replace the following bulbs: RDipped-beam headlamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) RMain-beam H7 55 W36 or D1S 35 W*37 Side lamp/park- W 5 W ing lamp or LED*35 5 Before changing bulbs C5W headlamp RReplacing the bulb in the side lamp/parking lamp (vehicles with halogen headlamps) RTurn signal lamp (front) RLicence plate lamp Observe the following points: RUse only the bulb types specified here. RTo prevent a short-circuit, switch off the lights before changing a bulb. ROnly hold bulbs with a clean, lint-free cloth. RDo not work with wet or greasy fingers. RIf the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i Have the headlamp setting checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 35 These bulbs must be replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. with halogen headlamps. 37 Vehicles with xenon headlamps*: always have these bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z 36 Vehicles * optional 313 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 314 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Changing the bulbs Changing the front bulbs X Pull out the bulb holder. X Change the bulb. X Insert the bulb holder into the headlamp and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Place housing cover 4 back on and turn it clockwise until it engages. Replacing the bulbs in the main-beam headlamp Halogen or bi-xenon* headlamps 1 Bulb holder for turn signal 2 Bulb holder for main-beam headlamp 3 Bulb holder for side/parking lamp 4 Housing cover for dipped-beam headlamp (halogen/bi-xenon headlamps) Replacing dipped-beam headlamps (vehicles with halogen headlamps) X Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. X Turn housing cover 4 anti-clockwise and remove it. X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise until it is released. 314 X Turn bulb holder 3 anti-clockwise and pull it out. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder 3. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 3. X Insert bulb holder 3 into the headlamp and turn it clockwise until it engages. Replacing the bulbs in the turn signal lamps X Switch off the lights. X Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. X Open the bonnet. X Turn bulb holder 2 anti-clockwise and remove it together with the bulb. X Turn bulb holder 1 anti-clockwise and remove it along with the bulb. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder 2. X X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 2. X Insert bulb holder 2 into the headlamp and turn it clockwise until it engages. Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, applying slight pressure, and remove it from bulb holder 1. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder 1 and turn it clockwise. X Insert bulb holder 1 into the headlamp and turn it clockwise until it engages. Replacing the bulb in the side lamp/ parking lamp (vehicles with halogen headlamps) X Switch off the lights. X Open the bonnet. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 315 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Replacing the wiper blades Changing the rear bulbs Changing the bulbs in the licence plate lamps Replacing the wiper blades Removing Windscreen wiper blades G Risk of accident The windscreen will not longer be properly wiped if the wiper blades are worn. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions, thereby causing an accident. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and autumn. G Risk of accident Licence plate lamps (Saloon) 1 Screws X Switch off the lights. X Open the boot lid. X Remove screws 1. X Remove the licence plate lamp. X Replace the bulb. X Insert the licence plate lamp. X Replace and tighten screws 1. The wiper arms could start moving and cause an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blades. ! Make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the windscreen wiper to avoid damaging the windscreen wiper blades. Moving the wiper blades to a vertical position Vehicles without KEYLESS GO* X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Set the windscreen wipers to position u (Y page 106) on the combination switch. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, turn the key to position M and remove it from the ignition lock. Z * optional 315 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 316 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Replacing the wiper blades X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. Removing the wiper blades G Risk of injury The wiper arm could be set in motion and injure you if the windscreen wipers are switched on. Remove the key from the ignition lock before replacing the wiper blade. Vehicles with KEYLESS GO* X Switch off the engine. X Take your foot off the brake pedal. X Set the windscreen wipers to position u (Y page 106) on the combination switch. X Press the KEYLESS GO button repeatedly until the windscreen wipers start. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, press the KEYLESS GO button. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windscreen until it engages. X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm. 316 Rear window wiper blade (Estate) Removing X Remove the wiper blade from the retainer on the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. Fitting X Slide the new wiper blade into the retainer on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow. X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windscreen. 1 Wiper blade 2 Tab 3 Retainer 4 Removing * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 317 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window until it engages. X Turn wiper blade 1 at a right angle to wiper arm. X Press tab 2 and push wiper blade 1 off the retainer in the direction of arrow 4. X Remove wiper blade 1. Fitting X Insert the new wiper blade into retainer 3 in the opposite direction to arrow 4 until tab 2 engages. X Make sure that wiper blade 1 is seated correctly. X Turn wiper blade 1 parallel to the wiper arm. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear window. Flat tyre Move the selector lever to P. Your vehicle may be equipped with: Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 255) X Ra For all vehicles "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* (Y page 255) X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area whilst a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Place the warning triangle (Y page 252) or warning lamps at a suitable distance. Observe legal requirements. Ra collapsible emergency spare wheel* (Y page 255) Ra spare wheel* (Y page 255) Rthe MOExtended run-flat system* (Y page 328) Preparing the vehicle i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOE tyres*. X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as possible on solid, non-slippery, level ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Firmly depress the parking brake. Vehicles with manual transmission X * optional Vehicles with automatic transmission* Shift to either first or reverse gear. G Risk of injury The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. If you intend to work under the vehicle, it must be placed on stands. Z 317 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 318 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden blocks or similar as jacking supports. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. Do not start the engine at any time while the wheel is being changed. Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being supported by the jack. If you do not raise the vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack (e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the boot lid/tailgate is opened or closed) and you could sustain serious injuries. Using the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread. You can use TIREFIT in outdoor temperatures down to -20 °C. G Risk of accident In the following situations, your safety is at particular risk and TIREFIT is unable to provide breakdown assistance: 318 Rif there are cuts or punctures in the tyre greater than 4 mm Rif the wheel rim is damaged Rif you have driven at very low tyre pressures or on a flat tyre Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X X Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or nails. Remove TIREFIT, the accompanying "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the electric air pump from the stowage well underneath the boot/luggage compartment floor (Y page 254). 1 Driver's field of vision sticker 2 Wheel sticker X Affix part 1 of the sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part 2 of the sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre. G Risk of injury TIREFIT must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 319 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with clean water. RChange out of clothing which has come into contact with TIREFIT immediately. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doctor immediately. Keep TIREFIT away from children. RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly with water and drink plenty of water. i Your vehicle may be equipped with one of two different air pumps. Version 1 can be identified by the flap, behind which the hose with the pressure gauge and cable are located; version 2 has a pressure gauge integrated in the electric air pump. X Open flap 2 on the electric air pump. X Pull connector 5 and air pump hose 6 from the housing. X Screw air pump hose 6 onto flange 7 of TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1. X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 head downwards into recess 3 of the electric air pump. Version 1 RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor immediately. RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes. i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene. G Risk of injury Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions shown on the sticker on the electric air pump. Version 1 1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 2 Flap 3 Recess 4 On/off switch 5 Electric connector with cable 8 Filler hose 9 Valve X Remove the cap from valve 9 on the faulty tyre. 6 Air pump hose 7 Flange Z 319 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 320 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre X Press on/off switch 4 on the electric air pump to I. The electric air pump is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. Do not switch off the electric pump during this phase. a Pressure release screw b Pressure gauge X Make sure pressure release screw a on pressure gauge b is fully closed. X Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 9. X Insert plug 5 into the socket of the cigarette lighter* (Y page 209) or into a 12V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 210). X Turn the key to position 1 (Y page 76) in the ignition lock. 320 X Let the electric pump run for five minutes. The tyre should then have a pressure of at least 1.8 bar. ! Do not operate the electric air pump for longer than six minutes without a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. The air pump can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after five minutes: X Switch off and disconnect the electric air pump and drive the vehicle forwards or backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. X Remove TIREFIT filler bottle 1 from the electric pump. X Pump up the tyre again. G Risk of accident If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached: X Press on/off switch 4 on the electric air pump to 0. The electric air pump is switched off. X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow it away. X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it away. X Pull away immediately. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly around the tyre. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the electric air pump. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 321 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre G Risk of accident G Risk of accident If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The “max. 80 km/h” sticker must be affixed within the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X X X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the electric air pump. To reduce the tyre pressure: open pressure release screw a on pressure gauge b. Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Version 2 H Environmental note Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 1 TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 2 Recess 3 On/off switch 4 Electric connector with cable 5 Air pump hose 6 Flange X Pull connector with cable 4 and air pump hose 5 from the housing. X Screw air pump hose 5 onto flange 6 of TIREFIT filler bottle 1. X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the electric air pump. Z 321 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 322 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre X Press on/off switch 3 on the electric air pump to I. The electric air pump is switched on. The tyre is inflated. i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. Do not switch off the electric pump during this phase. X 7 Valve 8 Filler hose X Remove the cap from valve 7 on the faulty tyre. X Screw filler hose 8 onto valve 7. X Insert plug 4 into the socket of the cigarette lighter* (Y page 209) or into a 12V power socket in your vehicle (Y page 210). X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. 322 Let the electric pump run for five minutes. The tyre should then have a pressure of at least 1.8 bar. ! Do not operate the electric air pump for longer than six minutes without a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. The air pump can be operated again once it has cooled down. If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached after five minutes: X Switch off and disconnect the electric air pump and drive the vehicle forwards or backwards approximately 10 m. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. X Remove TIREFIT filler bottle 1 from the electric pump. X Pump up the tyre again. G Risk of accident If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tyre pressure of 1.8 bar is reached: X Press on/off switch 3 on the electric air pump to 0. The electric air pump is switched off. X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow it away. X Fold up the warning triangle and stow it away. X Pull away immediately. This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly around the tyre. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure with the electric air pump. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 323 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the electric air pump. To reduce the tyre pressure: press yellow pressure release button 9 next to pressure gauge a. G Risk of accident If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safetyrelated systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of accident Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h. The “max. 80 km/h” sticker must be affixed within the driver's field of vision. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. H Environmental note 9 Pressure release button a Pressure gauge X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar, correct it (see fuel filler flap for values). * optional Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Changing a wheel and fitting the spare wheel* G Risk of accident The wheel dimensions and tyre size of the spare wheel*, the emergency spare wheel* and standard wheels may differ from one another. Your vehicle's handling characteristics will be altered when a "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* is fitted. Adapt your style of driving accordingly. The "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* may only be used as a temporary measure. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h and do not deactivate ESP®. Never drive the vehicle with more than one “Minispare”/collapsible emergency spare wheel* fitted. G Risk of accident Have the “Minispare”/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel* replaced with a new wheel as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work 323 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 324 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Rslip On downhill gradients: place chocks or similar under both wheels of the other axle. Rbe Raising the vehicle Preparing the vehicle X Prepare the vehicle as described (Y page 317). X If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it. X Place the wheels in the straight-ahead position. X Take out the following from the stowage area beneath the boot/luggage compartment floor: Rthe "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel* X Rthe vehicle tool kit Rthe wheel chock Rthe jack Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. On level ground: place chocks or similar under the front and rear of the wheel that 324 off the jack Rinjure you or others damaged It is thus important to ensure that the jack is positioned correctly in the respective jacking points. Before positioning the jack, remove any dirt that may have collected in the jacking points. The jacking points for the jack are located behind the wheel housings of the front wheels and in front of the wheel housings of the rear wheels. 1 Wheel wrench X Using wheel wrench 1, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. G Risk of accident If you fail to position the jack correctly, the vehicle may: 1 Jacking point 2 Jack 3 Crank X Position jack 2 at jacking point 1. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 325 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre G Risk of accident X X X Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned directly under jacking point 1. 1 Centring pin X Turn crank 3 until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X In place of the wheel bolt, screw centring pin 1 from the vehicle tool kit into the thread. Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. This could cause damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads. X Remove the wheel. If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must not drive the vehicle any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or Service 24h for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G Risk of accident Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Other bolts could work loose. Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle could topple off the jack. Fitting a new wheel G Risk of accident Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. Z 325 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 326 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre X 1 Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the factory X X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. Place the "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or the spare wheel onto the centring pin and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the centring pin. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. Inflating the collapsible emergency spare wheel* with the electric air pump G Risk of accident Pump up the collapsible emergency spare wheel before lowering the vehicle, as you could otherwise damage the wheel rim. The electric air pump is located in the stowage well under the boot/luggage compartment floor. 326 Take the electric air pump out of the stowage well under the boot/luggage compartment floor. 1 Flap 2 On/off switch 3 Electric connector with cable 4 Air pump hose with pressure gauge and pressure release screw 5 Union nut X Open flap 1. X Pull connector 3 and air hose 4 out of the housing. X Make sure that the pressure release screw on the pressure gauge is closed. X Remove the cap from the valve on the tyre. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 327 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre Open the pressure release screw on the pressure gauge until the tyre pressure is correct. X Screw union nut 5 on air hose 4 onto the valve. X Insert plug 3 into the cigarette lighter socket* (Y page 209) or into a 12V socket in your vehicle (Y page 210). X X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Lowering the vehicle X Press on/off switch 2 on the electric air pump to I. The electric air pump is switched on. The tyre is inflated. X X X X Disconnect the electric air pump and stow it away. Lower the vehicle. To do this, turn the crank of the jack anti-clockwise until the vehicle is standing firmly on the ground again. Place the jack to one side. When a tyre pressure of 3.5 bar has been reached, press 0 on the electric air pump switch. The electric air pump is switched off. X Turn the jack back to its initial position and store it and the rest of the vehicle tool kit in the boot/luggage compartment. Vehicles with the "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel*: X X longer than six minutes without a break. Otherwise, it may overheat. The air pump can be operated again once it has cooled down. 1 – 5 Wheel bolts X * optional Have the tightening torque checked immediately after a wheel is changed. The wheels could work loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 130 Nm. Pack the faulty wheel in the protective film provided with the "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* and transport the wheel in the boot/luggage compartment. or ! Do not operate the electric air pump for If the tyre pressure is higher than 3.5 bar: G Risk of accident Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (1 to 5). The tightening torque must be 130 Nm. Depending on the size of the wheel, you may also be able to secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel well. In this case, you will have to remove the stowage well casing from the spare wheel well and stow it securely in the boot/luggage compartment. i Do not activate the tyre pressure monitor* until the deflated tyre has been removed from the vehicle. Z 327 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 328 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Flat tyre MOExtended run-flat system* The MOExtended run-flat system must only be used in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or the tyre pressure monitor*. ! The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the load in the vehicle. It is 50 km if the vehicle is partially laden and 30 km if fully laden. The maximum range that can be driven in emergency operation is measured from the point at which the pressure loss warning message appears in the multi-function display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 80 km/h. i Vehicles featuring the MOExtended run- flat system are not equipped with the TIREFIT kit*. It is therefore recommended to additionally equip your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit* when fitting tyres that do not feature runflat properties, e.g. winter tyres. i A TIREFIT kit* is available from any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a MercedesBenz Service Centre. G Risk of accident The handling characteristics of your vehicle deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example: Rwhen cornering Rwhen braking Rwhen accelerating rapidly Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid sudden changes in direction and sudden acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles (i.e. kerbs, potholes), and driving off-road. This is particularly the case when the vehicle is heavily laden. The maximum permissible distance that can be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy load, sudden acceleration and/or manoeuvring, the road surface condition, outside temperature, etc., or further if you drive carefully and conservatively. Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if: Ryou hear banging noises Rthe 328 Ryou see smoke and smell rubber RESP® is intervening constantly Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tyre After driving in run-flat mode, you must have the rims checked for damage at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. The faulty tyre must be replaced in every case. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i On a vehicle with MOExtended tyres, only MOExtended spare tyres should be used. These must be of the size specified for the vehicle. vehicle starts to shake * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 329 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Battery Battery Notes on the battery In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. Have the battery charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. To prevent damage from corrosion, only replace the battery with one that has a central ventilation cover. Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for a long period of time. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. G Risk of injury Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Observe this Owner's Manual. H Environmental note Do not dispose of batteries with the household rubbish. Dispose of defective batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take them to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or a special collection point for old batteries. G Risk of injury Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. To prevent acid burns, observe the following safety notes when handling batteries: RDo not lean over batteries. RDo not place any metal objects on a battery. You could otherwise cause a short circuit and the battery's highly flammable gas mixture could ignite. RMake sure that you do not create an electrostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics. Therefore, you should not pull or slide the battery over carpets or other synthetic materials. RNever touch the battery first. To discharge a possible electrostatic charge, 329 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 330 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Battery 4 Breather hose step out of the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. i On vehicles with a spare tyre*, the battery RDo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The is located in the recess on the right-hand side. battery may explode as a result of electrostatic charge or due to flying sparks. ! Switch the engine off and remove the key before unscrewing or disconnecting the terminal clamps from the battery. You may otherwise destroy electronic components such as the alternator. i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have all work involving the battery, e.g. removing, charging and replacing, carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Saloon: battery in the boot 1 Electrostatic protection 2 Battery Estate: battery under the cover in the luggage compartment on the right-hand side X Installation location of the battery Pull the cover upwards and remove it. Your vehicle is equipped with a battery in the boot. It is located under the cover in the spare wheel well. X Remove the luggage well (Y page 192). Saloon 1 Negative terminal 2 Positive terminal (under cover) 3 Cell cap 330 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 331 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Battery 4 Breather hose Electrostatic protection G Risk of injury Estate 1 Electrostatic protection 2 Battery Estate 1 Positive terminal (under cover) 2 Negative terminal 3 Cell cap * optional Only use rechargeable batteries with electrostatic protection fitted. The electrostatic protection prevents the creation of sparks due to electrostatic buildup, thereby preventing the highly explosive mixture of gases in the battery from igniting. Disconnecting the battery G Risk of accident If the battery is disconnected: Rthe brake boosting effect will not be available. Greater braking force will then be required and the brake pedal travel will be longer. If necessary, depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Ryou can no longer turn the key in the igni- tion and, on vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, pressing the KEYLESS GO button* will have no effect i You can obtain the electrostatic protection from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X To remove: pull the electrostatic protection upwards and remove. X To fit: push the electrostatic protection firmly onto the battery. Rthe selector lever is locked in position P on vehicles with automatic transmission* ! Always disconnect the battery in the order described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. X Firmly depress the parking brake and shift the selector lever to position P on vehicles with automatic transmission*. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. 331 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 332 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Battery X Open the boot/luggage compartment. X Remove the cover (Y page 256). X Remove the battery cover. X Remove the negative terminal clamp from the battery. X Remove the cover from the positive terminal clamp. X Remove the positive terminal clamp from the battery. X Disconnect the breather hose. Removing the battery Saloon Estate Charging and fitting the battery G Risk of injury 1 Spacer 2 Battery 3 Strap X Disconnect the battery (Y page 331). Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in place. X Disconnect the battery (Y page 331). X X Loosen the bolt which holds the battery in place. X Release strap 3 and remove the battery. X Release the strap and remove the battery. X Remove spacer 1 from the breather hose on the battery. Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. As the battery is being charged, gases can escape and generate minor explosions. This may injure you and other persons or cause damage to the paintwork or acid corrosion on the vehicle. You can obtain information about battery chargers which allow the battery to be charged when still installed from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury There is a risk of acid burns during the charging process due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery during the charging process. ! Only charge the installed battery with a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery chargers allow the battery to be charged while it is still installed. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. 332 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 333 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Jump-starting X X Charge the battery. Observe the notes in the operating instructions for your battery charger. Refit the charged battery. To do this, follow the steps described in "Removing the battery" (Y page 332) in reverse order. ! Do not fit refillable batteries without elec- trostatic protection. The electrostatic discharge could otherwise cause the battery to explode. The battery acid released could cause damage to your vehicle. Further information on electrostatic protection (Y page 331). G Risk of injury Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Reconnecting the battery ! Always reconnect the battery in the sequence described below. Never swap the terminal clamps. You may otherwise damage the vehicle electronics. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Connect the positive terminal clamp and secure the cover. X Connect the negative terminal clamp. X Connect the breather hose. Make sure that a cell cap is fitted between the battery and the breather hose. X Refit the electrostatic protection if necessary (Y page 331). i If the battery power supply has been interrupted (e.g. if it has been reconnected), you must carry out the following tasks: RSet the time (Y page 135). RReset the sliding/tilting sunroof* (Y page 182). RReset the function for folding the exterior mirrors in/out automatically* by folding the mirrors out once (Y page 91). * optional Jump-starting Jump-starting your vehicle If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from an external battery using jump leads. Observe the following points: RJump-starting may only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads which are protected against polarity reversal and which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. i Jump leads which are protected against polarity reversal and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Never start the vehicle using a rapid battery charger. 333 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 334 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Jump-starting G Risk of injury Saloon There is a risk of acid burns when jumpstarting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over the battery while the engine is being jumpstarted. G Risk of explosion Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. You will find these under “Battery” in the index. X Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. X Depress the parking brake. X Manual transmission: engage neutral. X Automatic transmission*: move the selector lever to P. X All vehicles: switch off all electrical consumers. 334 1 Negative terminal on your vehicle 2 Positive terminal on your vehicle 3 Positive terminal of donor battery 4 Negative terminal of donor battery X If your vehicle is being jump-started by another vehicle, allow the other vehicle's engine to idle. X Connect positive terminal 2 on your vehicle to positive terminal 3 of the donor battery using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery. X Connect negative terminal 4 of the donor battery to negative terminal 1 of your vehicle's battery using the jump lead, con- necting the jump lead to the donor battery first. X Start the engine. X When the engine is running, switch on a few electrical consumers, e.g. the blower. Do not switch on the lights. X First disconnect the jump lead from negative terminals 1 and 4, then from positive terminals 2 and 3 each time beginning with your vehicle's battery. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 335 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Jump-starting Estate 1 Cover 2 Rotary catches X Turn three rotary catches 2 through a quarter turn. X Remove cover 1 forwards. 1 Earth point on your vehicle 2 Positive terminal on your vehicle (under cover) X If your vehicle is being jump-started by another vehicle, allow the other vehicle's engine to idle. X Connect the positive terminals of the two batteries using the jump lead, beginning with your own battery. X Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery to the body earth point using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to the negative terminal of the donor battery first. X Start the engine. X When the engine is running, switch on a few electrical consumers, e.g. the blower. Do not switch on the lights. X Remove the jump lead from earth point 1 on your own vehicle and from the negative terminal of the donor vehicle first, then from the positive terminals, beginning with your vehicle's battery. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Jump-starting another vehicle You can jump-start another vehicle which has a flat battery. Observe the following points: ROnly 12 V batteries can be jump-started. RDo not jump-start frozen batteries. Allow the battery to thaw first. RObserve vehicle. the requirements for the other ROnly use jump leads which are protected against polarity reversal and which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. G Risk of acid burns There is a risk of acid burns when jumpstarting a vehicle due to the gases which escape from the battery. Do not lean over 335 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 336 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Jump-starting the battery while the engine is being jumpstarted. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Start the engine and allow it to idle. G Risk of explosion Gases escaping from the battery during jump-starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames away from the battery, and do not smoke. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. You will find these under “Battery” in the index. ! You must not use the jump-start connectors in the engine compartment to jumpstart another vehicle. The jump-start connectors are not suitable for jump-starting another vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged by this. Estate 1 Positive terminal of your vehicle's battery Saloon 1 Negative terminal of your vehicle's bat- tery 2 Positive terminal of your vehicle's battery 2 Negative terminal of your vehicle's bat- tery X Connect the positive terminals of the two batteries using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to the donor battery first. X Connect the negative terminals of the batteries using the jump lead, connecting the jump lead to the donor battery first. X Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch. X Depress the parking brake. X Start the engine. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage neutral. X X Vehicles with automatic transmission*: move the selector lever to P. First disconnect the jump lead from the negative terminals and then from the positive terminals, beginning with the other vehicle's battery. 336 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 337 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Towing and tow-starting Towing and tow-starting G Risk of accident Points to remember The vehicle is braked when HOLD is activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD if the vehicle is to be towed. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. G Risk of accident If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid towing bar if: Rthe engine is not running Rthere is a brake system malfunction Rthe voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system is damaged The electric power steering and the brake force boosting effect do not work when the engine is not running. Greater braking force will then be required and the brake pedal travel will be longer. If necessary, depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Do not tow the vehicle if the key cannot be turned in the ignition lock. If this is the case, the steering is locked and the vehicle cannot be steered. If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. When towing, observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned. ! When towing, pull away slowly and with- out jerking. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. Do not use the towing eye for recovery. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. With towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle needs to be lifted up and transported. ! Only secure the tow cable or towing bar to the towing eyes. You may otherwise damage the vehicle. * optional RVehicles with an automatic transmission* must not be tow-started. RIf the engine does not start, try jump starting (Y page 333). RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle, have it towed to the nearest qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. RIf the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, only tow it with the propeller shaft disconnected. RThe automatic transmission* selector lever must be in the N position when towing the vehicle away. RIf you are towing the vehicle over a considerable distance, this must only be done with the rear axle raised. RThe ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the front/rear axle ® raised. Intervention by ESP could otherwise damage the brake system. RVehicles with 4MATIC* may not be towed with the front or rear axle raised. RBefore towing the vehicle, make sure that the battery is connected and charged. Otherwise: 337 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 338 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Towing and tow-starting - you cannot switch on the ignition - you cannot move the selector lever to N (on vehicles with automatic transmission*) - you have no support when braking right-hand side of the vehicle when viewed in the direction of travel. Opening the rear cover i Switch off the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 137). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Fitting the towing eye Opening the front cover The mountings for the removable towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are located at the front and rear under the covers on the 338 1 Cover X Push cover 1 back in the direction of the arrow along its entire lower edge. X Take cover 1 off the opening. 1 Cover X Press cover 1 back in the direction of the arrow. X Take cover 1 off the opening. Securing the towing eye X Take the towing eye and the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 254). X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop. X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the towing eye and tighten. * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 339 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Towing and tow-starting Towing the vehicle ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. With towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle needs to be lifted up and transported. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC* may not be towed with the front or rear axle raised. ! The engine must be switched off (key in ignition lock in position 0 or position 1) if the vehicle is being towed with the rear axle raised or if the parking brake is being tested on a dynamometer. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Vehicles with manual transmission X X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Vehicles with automatic transmission* X Tow the vehicle or let it roll. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X X Move the selector lever to N. Shift to a suitable gear and bring the clutch pedal up slowly. Do not depress the accelerator pedal. The engine is started. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) Please note: RVehicles with an automatic transmission* must not be tow-started. RThe battery must be connected. RThe engine and catalytic converter must be cold. RAvoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Removing the towing eye X Take the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 254). X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the towing eye and turn it anti-clockwise. X Unscrew the towing eye. X Replace the cover and press it until it engages. X Return the towing eye and the wheel wrench to the vehicle tool kit. Vehicles with manual transmission X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Fully depress the clutch pedal. X Shift to neutral. Shift to neutral. Z * optional 339 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 340 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Fuses Transporting the vehicle The towing eyes can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Vehicles with manual transmission X Shift to neutral. Vehicles with automatic transmission* X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Move the selector lever to N. Fuses ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. Notes on changing fuses The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. A MercedesBenz Service Centre will be happy to advise you. G Risk of fire Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the systems concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge faulty fuses. Otherwise, a circuit overload could cause a fire. Have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RMain fuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard RFuse box in the boot/luggage compartment on the left-hand side of the vehicle Fuse allocation chart The fuse allocation chart is in the main fuse box in the dashboard. Before changing a fuse X Park the vehicle. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 340 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 341 Version: 2.9.4 Practical advice Fuses Main fuse box The main fuse box is located on the driver's side of the dashboard. X Remove cover 1 from the dashboard using a flat, blunt object 2. X Pull cover 1 in the direction of the arrow by hand and remove it. X To close: clip in cover 1 at the front. X Fold cover 1 inwards until it engages. X Close the driver's door. Fuse box in the boot or luggage compartment Saloon The fuse box is located in the boot behind the trim on the left-hand side when viewed in the direction of travel. 1 Main fuse box cover 2 Flat, blunt object ! Do not use a pointed object, such as a screwdriver, to open the fuse box in the dashboard. You could otherwise damage the dashboard. X To open: open the driver’s door. X Insert a flat, blunt object into the recess as a lever 2. 1 Catches 2 Cover X To open: open the boot lid. X Turn both catches 1 anti-clockwise. X Remove cover 2. X To close: insert and engage cover 2. X Close the boot lid. Z 341 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, Practical advice Fuses Estate The fuse box is located in the luggage compartment behind the side trim on the lefthand side when viewed in the direction of travel. 1 Release button 2 Cover X To open: open the tailgate. X Press release button 1. X Fold cover 2 down in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert and engage cover 2. X Close the tailgate. 342 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 342 Version: 2.9.4 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 343 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Introduction to technical data ......... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... Vehicle electronics ........................... Vehicle identification plates ............ Engine ................................................ Performance ...................................... Tyres and wheels .............................. Vehicle dimensions .......................... Vehicle weights ................................. 344 344 345 346 348 352 356 366 369 Trailer coupling* ............................... 375 Service products and capacities ..... 377 Frequencies for garage door openers* .................................................... 391 343 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 344 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Introduction to technical data i The technical data was determined in accordance with EU directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equipment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories which have been specifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to evaluate other parts. MercedesBenz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been independently or officially approved. In Germany and some other countries, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz parts meet this requirement. The use of nonapproved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. This is the case if: Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted Rother road users could be endangered Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely affected The use of non-approved parts could affect your vehicle's operating safety. MercedesBenz therefore recommends genuine 344 Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been approved for your vehicle. H Environmental note Daimler also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts and to which the same warranty applies. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approved conversion parts and accessories are available from Mercedes-Benz Service Centres. There, you can also receive advice about technical modifications and have the parts professionally fitted. Always quote the vehicle identification number and the engine number when ordering genuine parts. You will find these numbers on the vehicle data card in the Service Booklet or on your vehicle's identification plates (Y page 346). Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 345 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle electronics Vehicle electronics Tampering with the engine electronics G Risk of accident Only have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The vehicle's roadworthiness could otherwise be affected. ! Only have work done on the engine elec- tronics and its associated parts, such as control units, sensors and connector leads, carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise, vehicle components may wear more quickly and your vehicle's warranty and operating permit may be invalidated. Retrofitting electrical and electronic equipment Electrical and electronic equipment can jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle. If equipment of this kind is retrofitted, it must be type-approved and bear the e mark. The e mark may be obtained from the equipment manufacturer or an authorised testing centre. ! Damage or consequential damage arising from fitting equipment not approved by Mercedes-Benz is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. If you wish to install two-way radios in the vehicle, you must obtain formal approval. Mercedes-Benz approves the installation of two-way radios if such equipment is installed professionally and a low-reflection exterior aerial is used. The transmission output of the two-way radio must not exceed the maximum transmission outputs listed. G Risk of accident Two-way radios may interfere with the vehicle electronics and thereby jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle and your own safety if: Rthey do not have an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is not a low-reflection aerial Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted incorrectly G Risk of injury Excessive electromagnetic radiation may also cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. For this reason, only have the exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of an approved exterior aerial. This ensures optimal reception quality for mobile tele- 345 Z Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 346 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle identification plates phones/wireless devices in the vehicle. This also ensures that interference between these devices and the vehicle's electronics is kept to a minimum. If installed, the exterior aerial conducts the electromagnetic fields transmitted by a mobile phone to the exterior of the vehicle. Vehicle identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) and paint code number The vehicle identification plate is located at the bottom of the door frame on the frontpassenger side. Frequency range Maximum transmission output (watts) Short wave (< 50 MHz) 100 Vehicle identification plate (example) 1 Vehicle identification plate 4 m waveband 20 2 Vehicle manufacturer 3 EU type approval number 2 m waveband 50 70 cm waveband 35 25 cm waveband 10 4 Vehicle identification number (VIN) 5 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 1 Vehicle identification plate X ! If electrical or electronic equipment which does not comply with the above installation conditions is operated inside the vehicle, the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated (EU Directive 95/54/EC) - Automotive EMC directive) 346 Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate 1. 6 Maximum permissible towing weight 7 Maximum permissible front axle load 8 Maximum permissible rear axle load 9 Paint code number Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 347 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle identification plates Vehicle identification number (VIN) In addition to the information on the vehicle identification plate, the vehicle identification number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle body. It is located on the floor in front of the front-passenger seat. Engine number The engine number is stamped on the engine block (crankcase). More information can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 1 Floor covering 2 Vehicle identification number (VIN) X Slide the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering 1 upwards. You will see the vehicle identification number (VIN) 2. Z 347 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 348 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Engine Engine E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC 135 kW (183 bhp) 150 kW (203 bhp) 170 kW (231 bhp) 170 kW (231 bhp) 5,500 rpm 6,100 rpm 6,000 rpm 6,000 rpm 250 Nm 245 Nm 300 Nm 300 Nm 2,800 – 5,000 rpm 2,900 – 5,500 rpm 2,500 – 5,000 rpm 2,500 – 5,000 rpm 4 6 6 6 Displacement 1,796 cm3 2,496 cm3 2,996 cm3 2,996 cm3 Maximum engine speed 6,300 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm Rated output At engine speed Rated torque At engine speed Number of cylinders Rated output At engine speed Rated torque At engine speed Number of cylinders 348 E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC 200 kW (272 bhp) 200 kW (272 bhp) 285 kW (387 bhp) 285 kW (387 bhp) 6,000 rpm 6,000 rpm 6,000 rpm 6,000 rpm 350 Nm 350 Nm 530 Nm 530 Nm 2,400 – 5,000 rpm 2,400 – 5,000 rpm 2,800 – 4,800 rpm 2,800 – 4,800 rpm 6 6 8 8 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 349 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Engine E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC Displacement 3,498 cm3 3,498 cm3 5,461 cm3 5,461 cm3 Maximum engine speed 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm 6,500 rpm E 63 AMG E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI 378 kW (514 bhp) 100 kW (136 bhp) 125 kW (170 bhp) 140 kW (190 bhp) 6,800 rpm 3,800 rpm 3,800 rpm 4,000 rpm 630 Nm 340 Nm 400 Nm 400 Nm (440 Nm38) 5,200 rpm 1,800 – 2,600 rpm 2,000 rpm 1,400 – 3,200 rpm (1,400 - 2,800 rpm38) 8 4 4 6 Displacement 6,208 cm3 2,148 cm3 2,148 cm3 2,987 cm3 Maximum engine speed 7,200 rpm 5,000 rpm 5,000 rpm 4,500 rpm Rated output At engine speed Rated torque At engine speed Number of cylinders Z 38 Only on vehicles with automatic transmission. 349 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 350 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Engine E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 320 CDI E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 420 CDI 140 kW (190 bhp) 165 kW (224 bhp) 165 kW (224 bhp) 231 kW (314 bhp) 4,000 rpm 3,800 rpm 3,800 rpm 3,600 rpm 440 Nm 540 Nm 510 Nm 730 Nm 1,400 – 2,800 rpm 1,600 – 2,400 rpm 1,600 – 2,800 rpm 2,200 rpm 6 6 6 8 Displacement 2,987 cm3 2,987 cm3 2,987 cm3 3,996 cm3 Maximum engine speed 4,500 rpm 4,500 rpm 4,500 rpm 4,600 rpm Rated output At engine speed Rated torque At engine speed Number of cylinders Rated output At engine speed Rated torque At engine speed Number of cylinders 350 E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec 215 kW (292 bhp) 155 kW (211 bhp) 6,400 rpm 3,400 rpm 365 Nm 540 Nm 3,000 – 5,100 rpm 1,600 – 2,400 rpm 6 6 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 351 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Engine E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec Displacement 3,498 cm3 2,987 cm3 Maximum engine speed 6,750 rpm 4,500 rpm Z 351 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 352 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Performance Performance Speeds 7-speed Automatic transmission* Maximum speed E 230 E 280 E 350 E 500 E 63 AMG Saloon 240 km/h 248 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h Estate – 238 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h E 280 CDI E 320 CDI E 420 CDI E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec Saloon 238 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h 244 km/h Estate 230 km/h 240 km/h – 250 km/h – 7-speed Automatic transmission* Maximum speed 5-speed Automatic transmission* Maximum speed 352 E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 280 4MATIC E 350 4MATIC E 500 4MATIC Saloon 232 km/h 244 km/h 250 km/h 250 km/h Estate 222 km/h 232 km/h 245 km/h 250 km/h * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 353 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Performance 5-speed Automatic transmission* Maximum speed E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 320 CDI 4MATIC Saloon 211 km/h 225 km/h 234 km/h 244 km/h Estate 200 km/h 218 km/h 226 km/h 236 km/h 6-speed Manual transmission Maximum speed E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 Saloon 236 km/h 248 km/h 250 km/h Estate 225 km/h 233 km/h 246 km/h E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI 214 km/h 227 km/h 241 km/h 202 km/h 218 km/h 231 km/h 6-speed Manual transmission Maximum speed Saloon Estate Z * optional 353 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 354 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Performance Acceleration from 0 to 100 km/h E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC 6-speed manual transmission Saloon 9.1 seconds 8.9 seconds 7.3 seconds – Estate 9.5 seconds 9.9 seconds 8.1 seconds – 5-speed automatic transmission Saloon 9.4 seconds – – 7.8 seconds Estate 9.7 seconds – – 8.3 seconds 7-speed automatic transmission Saloon – 9.1 seconds 7.3 seconds – Estate – 9.9 seconds 7.9 seconds – E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC 5-speed automatic transmission Saloon – 7.1 seconds – 5.5 seconds Estate – 7.4 seconds – 5.7 seconds 7-speed automatic transmission Saloon 6.9 seconds – 5.3 seconds – Estate 7.1 seconds – 5.4 seconds – 354 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 355 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Performance E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI 6-speed manual transmission Saloon 9.9 seconds 8.4 seconds 8.6 seconds Estate 10.5 seconds 9.1 seconds 9.1 seconds 5-speed automatic transmission Saloon 9.9 seconds 8.6 seconds – Estate 10.7 seconds 9.1 seconds – 7-speed automatic transmission Saloon – – 7.6 seconds Estate – – 8.2 seconds E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 320 CDI E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 420 CDI 5-speed automatic transmission Saloon 8.2 seconds – 7.4 seconds – Estate 9.0 seconds – 8.1 seconds – 7-speed automatic transmission Saloon – 6.8 seconds – 6.1 seconds Estate – 7.3 seconds – – 7-speed automatic transmission E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec E 63 AMG Saloon 6.8 seconds 7.2 seconds 4.5 seconds Estate 7.0 seconds – 4.6 seconds Z 355 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 356 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Tyres and wheels Tyres and wheels ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you only use tyres which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tyres are specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original i Further information about tyres and wheels can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You will find a table of tyre pressures on the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap . You will find further information about tyre pressures in the "Operation" section (Y page 229). RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended* (with run-flat characteristics) If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any responsibility for damage which may occur. Information about tyres can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ! If you fit tyres other than those tested and recommended by Mercedes-Benz, characteristics such as handling, noise levels and fuel consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, dimensional variations and different tyre deformation characteristics could cause the tyres to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. 356 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 357 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Tyres and wheels Tyres Saloon Both axles Both axles E 200 KOMPRESSOR/ E 200 CDI/E 220 CDI E 230/E 280/E 280 4MATIC E 300 Bluetec/E 350/ E 350 4MATIC/E 350/CGI/ E 280 CDI/E 280 CDI 4MATIC/ E 320 CDI/E 320 CDI 4MATIC Summer tyres 205/60 R16 92V 205/60 R16 92W – Winter tyres39 205/60 R16 92H M+S 205/60 R16 92H M+S – Wheels39 7J x 16 H2 ET 33 7J x 16 H2 ET 33 – Summer tyres 225/55 R16 95V 225/55 R16 95W 225/55 R16 95W Winter tyres 225/55 R16 95H M+S 225/55 R16 95H M+S 225/55 R16 95H M+S Wheels 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 42 or 8J x 16 H2 ET 36 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 42 or 8J x 16 H2 ET 36 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 42 or 8J x 16 H2 ET 36 Z 39 Not in conjunction with sports package* optional equipment. * optional 357 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 358 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Tyres and wheels Both axles All models except E 63 AMG E 63 AMG Summer tyres40 245/45 R17 95W – Summer tyres40,41 245/45 R17 95W MOExtended – Winter tyres40 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S – Winter tyres40, 41, 42 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S MOExtended – Winter tyres – 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S Wheels 8J x 17 H2 ET 38 or 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 38 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 40 Only in conjunction with sports suspension*, AIRMATIC DC* or AVANTGARDE suspension*. with run-flat characteristics and only in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor* activated. 42 Not available directly from the factory. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 41 Tyres 358 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 359 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Tyres and wheels Estate Both axles Both axles E 200 KOMPRESSOR/E 200 CDI/E 220 CDI/ E 280 CDI/E 280 CDI 4MATIC/E 320 CDI/ E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 230/E 280/E 280 4MATIC/E 350/ E 350 CGI/E 350 4MATIC Summer tyres 225/55 R16 95W 225/55 R16 95Y Winter tyres 225/55 R16 95H M+S 225/55 R16 95H M+S Wheels 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 42 or 8J x 16 H2 ET 36 7.5J x 16 H2 ET 42 or 8J x 16 H2 ET 36 Summer tyres43 245/45 R17 95W 245/45 R17 95Y Summer tyres43, 44 245/45 R17 95W MOExtended 245/45 R17 95Y MOExtended Winter tyres43 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S Winter tyres43, 44, 45 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S MOExtended 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S MOExtended Wheels 8J x 17 H2 ET 38 or 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 38 8J x 17 H2 ET 38 or 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 38 43 Only in conjunction with sports suspension*, AIRMATIC DC* or AVANTGARDE suspension*. with run-flat characteristics and only in conjunction with the tyre pressure loss warning system or tyre pressure monitor* activated. 45 Not available directly from the factory. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Z 44 Tyres * optional 359 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 360 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Tyres and wheels Both axles 46 Tyres E 500/E 500 4MATIC E 63 AMG Summer tyres 245/45 R17 95Y – Summer tyres46 245/45 R17 95Y MOExtended – Winter tyres 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S47 with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated. a maximum speed of 220 km/h is permitted with winter tyres. 47 Estate: 360 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 361 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Tyres and wheels E 500/E 500 4MATIC E 63 AMG Winter tyres46 , 48 245/45 R17 99V XL M+S MOExtended – Wheels 8J x 17 H2 ET 38 or 8.5J x 17 H2 ET 38 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 AMG equipment* Front axle Rear axle All models except 4MATIC vehicles and E 63 AMG 4MATIC vehicles Summer tyres 245/40 ZR 18 245/40 ZR 18 97Y XL Winter tyres 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 Summer tyres49 265/35 ZR 18 XL 245/40 ZR 18 97Y XL Light-alloy wheels 9J x 18 H2 ET 39 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 46 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with the tyre pressure loss warning or tyre pressure monitor* activated. available directly from the factory. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. 49 Use of snow chains not possible. Z 48 Not * optional 361 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 362 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Tyres and wheels 50 Use 4MATIC vehicles Winter tyres50, 51 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 of snow chains only possible on rear axle. the maximum permissible speed with winter tyres is 225 km/h. 51 Estate: 362 All models except 4MATIC vehicles and E 63 AMG Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 363 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Tyres and wheels Performance Package* Front axle Rear axle Both axles E 63 AMG mixed tyres (Saloon and Estate) E 63 AMG Performance Package* Summer tyres 245/40 ZR 18 245/40 ZR 18 Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 Summer tyres52 265/35 ZR 18 XL 265/35 ZR 18 XL Light-alloy wheels 9J x 18 H2 ET 39 9.5J x 18 H2 ET 44 Winter tyres53, 54 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S 245/40 R 18 97V XL M+S Light-alloy wheels 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5J x 18 H2 ET 38 52 Use of snow chains not possible. of snow chains only possible on rear axle. 54 Estate: the maximum permissible speed with winter tyres is 220 km/h. Z 53 Use * optional 363 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 364 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Tyres and wheels Sports package* Front axle Rear axle Both axles 55 Estate: 364 All models except 4MATIC vehicles: 4MATIC vehicles and E 63 AMG Saloons 4MATIC vehicles: Estates Summer tyres 245/40 R18 93Y 245/40 R18 93Y 245/40 R18 97Y XL Light-alloy wheels 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 Summer tyres 265/35 R18 97Y XL 245/40 R18 93Y 245/40 R18 97Y XL Light-alloy wheels 9J x 18 H2 ET 39 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 Winter tyres 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S 245/40 R18 97V XL M+S55 Light-alloy wheels 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 8.5 J x 18 H2 ET 38 a maximum speed of 225 km/h is permitted with winter tyres. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 365 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Tyres and wheels Spare wheel* Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT, a "Minispare"/collapsible emergency spare wheel* or a spare wheel* depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted. ! The spare wheel* must be inflated to the maximum tyre pressure given in the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap. i Vehicles with MOExtended tyres (tyres with run-flat characteristics) are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. "Minispare" emergency spare wheel*56 Collapsible emergency spare wheel*56 All models except E 63 AMG E 63 AMG Tyres T 155/70 R17 110M – Tyre pressure 4.2 bar – Wheels 4.0B x 17 H2 ET 34 – Tyres – 175/55 - 18 95P XL Tyre pressure – 3.5 bar Wheels – 6.0B x 18H2 ET 25 Z 56 Use of snow chains not possible. * optional 365 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 366 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC Saloon 4,852 mm 4,852 mm 4,852 mm 4,852 mm Estate 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm Vehicle width with Saloon exterior mirrors Estate folded out 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm Vehicle height Saloon 1,483 mm 1,483 mm 1,483 mm 1,498 mm Estate 1,506 mm 1,506 mm 1,506 mm 1,509 mm Saloon 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm Estate 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC Saloon 4,852 mm 4,852 mm 4,852 mm 4,852 mm Estate 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm Vehicle width with Saloon exterior mirrors Estate folded out 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm Vehicle length (ECE) Wheelbase Vehicle length (ECE) 366 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 367 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle dimensions E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC Saloon 1,484 mm 1,499 mm 1,465 mm 1,475 mm Estate 1,506 mm 1,509 mm 1,500 mm 1,513 mm Saloon 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm Estate 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm E 63 AMG E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI Saloon 4,881 mm 4,852 mm 4,852 mm 4,852 mm Estate 4,919 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm Vehicle width with Saloon exterior mirrors Estate folded out 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm Vehicle height Saloon 1,465 mm 1,483 mm 1,483 mm 1,484 mm Estate 1,500 mm 1,506 mm 1,506 mm 1,506 mm Saloon 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm Estate 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm Vehicle height Wheelbase Vehicle length (ECE) Wheelbase Z 367 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 368 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle dimensions E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 320 CDI E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 420 CDI Saloon 4,852 mm 4,852 mm 4,852 mm 4,852 mm Estate 4,884 mm 4,884 mm 4,884 mm – Vehicle width with Saloon exterior mirrors Estate folded out 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm – Vehicle height Saloon 1,499 mm 1,484 mm 1,499 mm 1,465 mm Estate 1,509 mm 1,506 mm 1,509 mm – Saloon 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm Estate 2,854 mm 2,854 mm 2,854 mm – Vehicle length (ECE) Wheelbase E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec Saloon 4,852 mm 4,852 mm Estate 4,884 mm – Vehicle width with Saloon exterior mirrors Estate folded out 2,063 mm 2,063 mm 2,063 mm – Vehicle length (ECE) 368 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 369 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle weights Vehicle height Wheelbase E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec Saloon 1,484 mm 1,484 mm Estate 1,506 mm – Saloon 2,854 mm 2,854 mm Estate 2,854 mm – Vehicle weights The unladen weight includes the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload. Specific data on weight is to be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 346). E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC Unladen weight Saloon (in accordance Estate with EC directive) 1,580 kg 1,650 kg 1,660 kg 1,780 kg 1,720 kg 1,775 kg 1,785 kg 1,905 kg Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Saloon 2,105 kg 2,175 kg 2,185 kg 2,305 kg Estate 2,295 kg 2,350 kg 2,360 kg 2,480 kg Z 369 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 370 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle weights E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC Maximum permissible front axle load Saloon 1,005 kg 1,045 kg 1,045 kg 1,150 kg Estate 975 kg 1,005 kg 1,005 kg 1,110 kg Maximum permissible rear axle load Saloon 1,145 kg 1,175 kg 1,185 kg 1,200 kg Estate 1,320 kg 1,345 kg 1,355 kg 1,370 kg Towing a trailer Saloon 1,195 kg 1,225 kg 1,235 kg 1,250 kg Estate 1,395 kg 1,420 kg 1,430 kg 1,430 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg Maximum boot load 57 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC 1,690 kg 1,785 kg 1,785 kg 1,880 kg 1,810 kg 1,910 kg 1,895 kg 1,990 kg Unladen weight Saloon (in accordance Estate with EC directive) 57 On vehicles with AIRMATIC and on the Estate it is important to observe the maximum permissible rear axle load. 370 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 371 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle weights E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 E 500 4MATIC Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Saloon 2,215 kg 2,310 kg 2,310 kg 2,405 kg Estate 2,385 kg 2,485 kg 2,460 kg 2,535 kg Maximum permissible front axle load Saloon 1,060 kg 1,145 kg 1,115 kg 1,200 kg Estate 1,010 kg 1,110 kg 1,080 kg 1,155 kg Maximum permissible rear axle load Saloon 1,200 kg 1,210 kg 1,240 kg 1,250 kg Estate 1,375 kg 1,375 kg 1,380 kg 1,380 kg Towing a trailer Saloon 1,250 kg 1,260 kg 1,290 kg 1,300 kg Estate 1,430 kg 1,430 kg 1,430 kg 1,430 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg Maximum boot load 58 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg Z 58 On vehicles with AIRMATIC and on the Estate it is important to observe the maximum permissible rear axle load. 371 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 372 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle weights E 63 AMG E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI Unladen weight Saloon (in accordance Estate with EC directive) 1,840 kg 1,615 kg 1,615 kg 1,715 kg 1,955 kg 1,785 kg 1,785 kg 1,845 kg Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Saloon 2,365 kg 2,140 kg 2,140 kg 2,240 kg Estate 2,460 kg 2,360 kg 2,360 kg 2,420 kg Maximum permissible front axle load Saloon 1,165 kg 1,040 kg 1,040 kg 1,105 kg Estate 1,110 kg 1,025 kg 1,025 kg 1,060 kg Maximum permissible rear axle load Saloon 1,245 kg 1,145 kg 1,145 kg 1,180 kg Estate 1,350 kg 1,335 kg 1,335 kg 1,360 kg Towing a trailer Saloon – 1,195 kg 1,195 kg 1,230 kg Estate – 1,385 kg 1,385 kg 1,410 kg Maximum roof load 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg Maximum boot load 59 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 59 On vehicles with AIRMATIC and on the Estate it is important to observe the maximum permissible rear axle load. 372 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 373 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle weights E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 320 CDI E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 420 CDI Unladen weight Saloon (in accordance Estate with EC directive) 1,840 kg 1,750 kg 1,845 kg 1,910 kg 1,965 kg 1,885 kg 1,980 kg – Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Saloon 2,365 kg 2,275 kg 2,370 kg 2,435 kg Estate 2,540 kg 2,460 kg 2,555 kg – Maximum permissible front axle load Saloon 1,210 kg 1,125 kg 1,210 kg 1,225 kg Estate 1,170 kg 1,080 kg 1,175 kg – Maximum permissible rear axle load Saloon 1,200 kg 1,195 kg 1,205 kg 1,255 kg Estate 1,370 kg 1,380 kg 1,380 kg – Towing a trailer Saloon 1,250 kg 1,245 kg 1,255 kg 1,305 kg Estate 1,430 kg 1,430 kg 1,430 kg – Maximum roof load 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg Maximum boot load 60 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg 100 kg Z 60 On vehicles with AIRMATIC and on the Estate it is important to observe the maximum permissible rear axle load. 373 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 374 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Vehicle weights E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec Unladen weight Saloon (in accordance Estate with EC directive) 1,720 kg 1,735 kg 1,840 kg – Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Saloon 2,245 kg 2,260 kg Estate 2,415 kg – Maximum permissible front axle load Saloon 1,080 kg 1,120 kg Estate 1,035 kg – Maximum permissible rear axle load Saloon 1,210 kg 1,185 kg Estate 1,380 kg – Towing a trailer Saloon 1,255 kg 1,235 kg Estate 1,435 kg – Maximum roof load 100 kg 100 kg Maximum boot load 61 100 kg 100 kg 61 On vehicles with AIRMATIC and on the Estate it is important to observe the maximum permissible rear axle load. 374 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 375 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Trailer coupling* Trailer coupling* Saloon Estate Anchorage points for the trailer coupling 1 Anchorage points Anchorage points for the trailer coupling 1 Anchorage points 2 Overhang dimension 2 Overhang dimension For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension is 1,234 mm. For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the overhang dimension is 1,264.5 mm. Mounting dimensions G Risk of accident Only have a trailer coupling retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. MercedesBenz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame. Z * optional 375 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 376 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Trailer coupling* Trailer loads Permissible trailer load, braked63 Permissible trailer load, unbraked Maximum drawbar noseweight65 All models except E 200/E 23062 E 200 E 230 Saloon 1,900 kg 1,700 kg64 Estate Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicles with automatic transmission* 1,900 kg 2,100 kg 1,700 kg64 2,100 kg Saloon 750 kg 750 kg Estate 750 kg 750 kg Saloon 76 kg 76 kg Estate 84 kg 84 kg 62 The E 63 AMG model cannot be used to tow a trailer. a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill 64 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 8 %: 1,900 kg 65 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load. 63 At 376 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 377 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Service products and capacities Notes on service products and capacities Service products are: Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use those products which have been tested and specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle and are listed in the MercedesBenz Owner's Manual in the relevant chapter since: Rparts and service products are matched Rdamage caused by the use of non-approved service products is not covered by the warranty You can recognise service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations that relate to a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Approval have not necessarily been approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury When handling, storing and disposing of any service products, please observe the relevant regulations, as you could otherwise endanger yourself and others. Keep service products away from children. To protect your health, do not allow service products to come into contact with your eyes or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if any service product is swallowed. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally-responsible manner. Fuels G Risk of explosion Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when handling fuels. Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heating* before refuelling. G Risk of injury Do not allow fuel to come into contact with skin or clothing. Allowing fuels to come into direct contact with your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is damaging to your health. Tank capacity Z * optional 377 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 378 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Saloon Estate 65 l 70 l E 280 /E 280 4MATIC 65 l (80 l)67 70 l (80 l)67 E 350/E 350 4MATIC 80 l 80 l E 500/E 500 4MATIC 80 l 80 l E 63 AMG 80 l 80 l E 300 Bluetec66 65 l – E 200 CDI66 65 l – E 220 CDI66 65 l 70 l E 280 CDI/E 280 CDI 4MATIC 65 l (80 l)67 70 l (80 l)67 E 320 CDI/E 320 CDI 4MATIC 80 l 80 l E 420 CDI 80 l – E 350 CGI 80 l 80 l Approximately 8 – 9 l Approximately 14 l Approximately 8 – 9 l Approximately 14 l E 200 KOMPRESSOR66 /E 230 Of which reserve fuel AMG vehicles 66 80 67 80 l fuel tank available as optional equipment. l fuel tank available as optional equipment for the CLASSIC equipment level. 378 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; preflight 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 379 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage to the injection system. Damage resulting from adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the warranty. More information about refuelling and fuels can be found in the "Operation" section. Introduction to fuel consumption The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat very low temperatures H Environmental note Rin urban traffic CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Ron short trips Rwhen Rin towing a trailer mountainous terrain The consumption figures have been determined in accordance with EU Directive 80 / 1268 / EEC test conditions. i Only for certain countries: the current consumption and emissions values of your vehicle can be found in the COC papers (EC-CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are supplied when the vehicle is delivered. Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as envi- ronmental influences or road conditions You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. ! Do not use any special additives, as they can cause malfunctions and engine damage. Damage resulting from the use of such additives is not covered by the MercedesBenz warranty. Z 379 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 380 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Fuel consumption The fuel consumption figures stated have been determined in accordance with the currently valid EU guidelines and the data does not relate to a single vehicle. These values may be different under normal operating conditions. Manual transmission Urban Extra-urban Overall (NEDC) CO2 emissions 380 E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 Saloon 11.7 – 12.2 l/100 km 13.3 – 13.5 l/100 km 13.4 – 13.6 l/100 km Estate 12.4 – 12.6 l/100 km 13.8 – 13.9 l/100 km 13.7 – 13.9 l/100 km Saloon 6.3 – 6.7 l/100 km 6.9 – 7.0 l/100 km 6.9 – 7.1 l/100 km Estate 6.7 – 7.0 l/100 km 7.1 – 7.4 l/100 km 7.2 – 7.4 l/100 km Saloon 8.2 – 8.8 l/100 km 9.2 – 9.4 l/100 km 9.3 – 9.5 l/100 km Estate 8.9 – 9.1 l/100 km 9.6 – 9.8 l/100 km 9.6 – 9.8 l/100 km Saloon 195 – 210 g/km 220 – 223 g/km 222 – 227 g/km Estate 212 – 217 g/km 229 – 233 g/km 229 – 234 g/km Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 381 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Manual transmission Urban Extra-urban Overall (NEDC) CO2 emissions E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI Saloon 8.2 – 8.6 l/100 km 8.2 – 8.7 l/100 km 9.5 – 9.7 l/100 km Estate 9.3 – 9.6 l/100 km 9.3 – 9.6 l/100 km 10.0 – 10.2 l/100 km Saloon 4.9 – 5.2 l/100 km 4.9 – 5.2 l/100 km 5.4 – 5.6 l/100 km Estate 5.6 – 5.9 l/100 km 5.6 – 5.9 l/100 km 5.6 – 5.8 l/100 km Saloon 6.1 – 6.4 l/100 km 6.1 – 6.4 l/100 km 6.9 – 7.1 l/100 km Estate 7.1 – 7.2 l/100 km 7.1 – 7.2 l/100 km 7.2 – 7.4 l/100 km Saloon 160 – 168 g/km 160 – 164 g/km 183 – 189 g/km Estate 188 – 189 g/km 188 – 189 g/km 191 – 196 g/km E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 Saloon 12.1 – 12.6 l/100 km 13.3 – 13.5 l/100 km 13.5 – 13.8 l/100 km Estate 12.9 – 13.0 l/100 km 13.9 – 14.1 l/100 km 13.8 – 14.1 l/100 km Saloon 6.5 – 6.8 l/100 km 7.3 – 7.5 l/100 km 7.0 – 7.3 l/100 km Estate 6.9 – 7.4 l/100 km 7.4 – 7.6 l/100 km 7.3 – 7.6 l/100 km Automatic transmission* Urban Extra-urban Z 381 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 382 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Automatic transmission* Overall (NEDC) CO2 emissions E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 Saloon 8.5 – 8.9 l/100 km 9.4 – 9.6 l/100 km 9.4 – 9.7 l/100 km Estate 9.2 – 9.4 l/100 km 9.7 – 9.9 l/100 km 9.7 – 10.0 l/100 km Saloon 202 – 212 g/km 225 – 230 g/km 224 – 232 g/km Estate 219 – 224 g/km 232 – 237 g/km 232 – 239 g/km E 280 4MATIC E 350 CGI E 300 Bluetec Saloon 13.8 – 14.2 l/100 km 13.0 – 13.5 l/100 km 9.9 – 10.1 l/100 km Estate 14.3 – 14.6 l/100 km 13.1 – 13.6 l/100 km – Saloon 7.6 – 8.0 l/100 km 6.3 – 6.7 l/100 km 5.6 – 5.9 l/100 km Estate 8.0 – 8.3 l/100 km 6.5 – 7.0 l/100 km – Saloon 9.9 – 10.2 l/100 km 8.7 – 9.2 l/100 km 7.2 – 7.5 l/100 km Estate 10.3 – 10.6 l/100 km 8.9 – 9.4 l/100 km – Saloon 237 – 245 g/km 208 – 219 g/km 189 – 199 g/km Estate 246 – 253 g/km 213 – 224 g/km – Automatic transmission* Urban Extra-urban Overall (NEDC) CO2 emissions 382 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 383 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Automatic transmission* Urban Extra-urban Overall (NEDC) CO2 emissions E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 500 Saloon 14.0 – 14.4 l/100 km 14.5 – 14.9 l/100 km 16.9 l/100 km Estate 14.1 – 14.6 l/100 km 14.7 – 15.3 l/100 km 17.3 l/100 km Saloon 7.2 – 7.8 l/100 km 8.0 – 8.3 l/100 km 8.2 l/100 km Estate 7.5 – 8.0 l/100 km 8.3 – 8.5 l/100 km 8.5 l/100 km Saloon 9.7 – 10.2 l/100 km 10.4 – 10.7 l/100 km 11.5 l/100 km Estate 9.9 – 10.4 l/100 km 10.6 – 11.0 l/100 km 11.8 l/100 km Saloon 231 – 244 g/km 247 – 255 g/km 273 g/km Estate 236 – 248 g/km 253 – 261 g/km 280 g/km E 500 4MATIC E 63 AMG E 200 CDI Saloon 17.8 l/100 km 22.3 l/100 km 9.0 – 9.8 l/100 km Estate 18.2 l/100 km 22.6 l/100 km 9.5 – 10.1 l/100 km Saloon 9.2 l/100 km 9.8 l/100 km 5.2 – 5.5 l/100 km Estate 9.5 l/100 km 9.9 l/100 km 5.7 – 6.1 l/100 km Automatic transmission* Urban Extra-urban Z * optional 383 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 384 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Automatic transmission* Overall (NEDC) CO2 emissions E 500 4MATIC E 63 AMG E 200 CDI Saloon 12.3 l/100 km 14.3 l/100 km 6.5 – 7.1 l/100 km Estate 12.6 l/100 km 14.5 l/100 km 7.1 – 7.5 l/100 km Saloon 293 g/km 341 g/km 173 – 186 g/km Estate 300 g/km 345 g/km 187 – 199 g/km E 220 CDI E 280 CDI E 280 CDI 4MATIC Saloon 9.1 – 9.6 l/100 km 10.1 – 10.4 l/100 km 10.4 – 10.6 l/100 km Estate 9.8 – 10.3 l/100 km 10.6 – 11.0 l/100 km 10.9 – 11.5 l/100 km Saloon 5.4 – 5.6 l/100 km 5.6 – 5.9 l/100 km 6.3 – 6.5 l/100 km Estate 5.9 – 6.2 l/100 km 5.9 – 6.4 l/100 km 6.7 – 6.8 l/100 km Saloon 6.7 – 7.1 l/100 km 7.2 – 7.5 l/100 km 7.8 – 8.0 l/100 km Estate 7.3 – 7.7 l/100 km 7.6 – 8.1 l/100 km 8.2 – 8.5 l/100 km Saloon 174 – 187 g/km 191 – 199 g/km 207 – 212 g/km Estate 194 – 202 g/km 202 – 215 g/km 218 – 226 g/km Automatic transmission* Urban Extra-urban Overall (NEDC) CO2 emissions 384 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 385 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Automatic transmission* Urban Extra-urban Overall (NEDC) CO2 emissions E 320 CDI E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 420 CDI Saloon 10.3 – 10.6 l/100 km 10.5 – 10.7 l/100 km 13.2 l/100 km Estate 10.6 – 11.0 l/100 km 11.0 – 11.6 l/100 km – Saloon 5.6 – 6.0 l/100 km 6.4 – 6.6 l/100 km 7.0 l/100 km Estate 5.9 – 6.4 l/100 km 6.8 – 6.9 l/100 km – Saloon 7.3 – 7.6 l/100 km 7.9 – 8.1 l/100 km 9.3 l/100 km Estate 7.6 – 8.1 l/100 km 8.3 – 8.6 l/100 km – Saloon 194 – 202 g/km 210 – 215 g/km 246 g/km Estate 202 – 215 g/km 220 – 228 g/km – Engine oil A list of engine oils tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Approval by Mercedes-Benz is also often indicated by the MB Sheet Number on the oil container. The table shows which MB Sheet number applies to which engine: Z * optional 385 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 386 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities MB Sheet number E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 350 CGI E 500 E 500 4MATIC E 63 AMG 229.3/229.31 229.5/229.51 229.3/229.5 229.3/229.5 229.3/229.5 229.3/229.5 229.568 E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 320 CDI E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 420 CDI E 300 Bluetec MB Sheet number With a diesel particulate filter 228.51/229.31/ 229.51 228.51/229.31/ 229.51 228.51/229.31/ 229.51 228.51/229.31/ 229.51 228.51/229.31/ 229.51 MB Sheet number Without a diesel particle filter69 228.3/228.5/ 228.51/ 229.3/229.31/ 229.5/229.51 228.3/228.5/ 228.51/ 229.3/229.31/ 229.5/229.51 228.3/228.5/ 228.51 229.3/229.31/ 229.5/229.51 228.3/228.5/ 228.51 229.3/229.31/ 229.5/229.51 — i In the event that the: Rengine Rgrade RSAE 68 Restriction: 69 Only 386 only SAE XW-40 engine oils may be used. for certain countries. oil brand (MB Sheet number) classification (viscosity) corresponding to the oil used in your engine is not available, you can use a different mineral or synthetic engine oil approved by Mercedes-Benz. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 387 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Mixing oils reduces the benefits of highgrade engine oil. mechanical assemblies. The use of lubricant additives limits warranty claims. ! Do not use lubricant additives, since they lead to increased wear and damage to the ! Engine oils for vehicles without a diesel particle filter may also be used temporarily in vehicles with a diesel particle filter if the engine oil listed is not available. You must then have an oil change carried out as soon as possible. Capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Engine with oil filter E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 350 CGI E 500 E 500 4MATIC E 300 Bluetec E 63 AMG Replacement amount 5.5 l 8.0 l 8.5 l 8.8 l Engine with oil filter E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 280 CDI E 320 CDI E 420 CDI Replacement amount 6.5 l 8.5 l 8.5 l 10.5 l Z 387 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 388 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Coolant The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Ranti-corrosion protection Rantifreeze Rraising protection the boiling point i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is topped up with a coolant that will ensure adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. ! Only top up with coolant that has been premixed with the desired quantity of antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. There is more information about coolant and topping it up on Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products Sheet 310.1. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the cooling system will not be sufficiently protected from corrosion, and the boiling point will be too low. 388 If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant will be around 130 °C. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the cooling system against freezing down to around – 37 °C. Rnot exceed 55% concentration (antifreeze protection down to –45 °C), otherwise heat will not be effectively dissipated. If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends using an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved for MercedesBenz. ! The cooling system contains a filling which must be renewed after 15 years, or after 250, 000 km at the latest. Have the renewal confirmed in the Service Booklet. The warranty is only valid if you top up with an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which has been approved by Mercedes-Benz, and observe the recommended mixing ratios. Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 389 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Capacities The following values indicate the total cooling system capacities. Coolant E 200 KOMPRESSOR E 230 E 280 E 280 4MATIC E 350 E 350 4MATIC E 350 CGI E 500 E 500 4MATIC E 63 AMG 9.2 l 10.0 l 12.0 l 11.3 l 11.8 l Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection Down to –37 °C (approx. 50%) 4.6 l 5.0 l 6.0 l 5.7 l 5.9 l Down to –45 °C (approx. 55%) 5.1 l 5.5 l 6.6 l 6.2 l 6.5 l Z 389 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 390 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Service products and capacities Coolant E 200 CDI E 220 CDI E 280 CDI E 280 CDI 4MATIC E 300 Bluetec E 320 CDI E 320 CDI 4MATIC E 420 CDI 10.2 l 10.2 l 13.0 l 13.0 l 15.3 l Amount of antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor required for antifreeze protection Down to –37 °C (approx. 50%) 5.1 l 5.1 l 6.5 l 6.5 l 7.7 l Down to –45 °C (approx. 55%) 5.6 l 5.6 l 7.2 l 7.2 l 8.4 l Brake fluid Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling point. G Risk of accident If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when driving downhill). This would impair braking efficiency. Have the brake fluid renewed every two years with a brake fluid that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz and have this confirmed in the Service Booklet. i There is usually a notice in the engine compartment to remind you when the next brake fluid change is due. Windscreen washer system The washer fluid reservoir holds approximately 4.5 litres; on vehicles with the headlamp cleaning system* it holds 7 litres. The headlamp cleaning system* and the windscreen washer system are both supplied from the washer fluid reservoir. X At temperatures above freezing point: Top up the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windscreen washer concentrate (Y page 226). X 390 At temperatures below freezing point: * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 391 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers* Top up the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water, antifreeze and windscreen washer concentrate (Y page 226). Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperatures. G Risk of fire Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when windscreen washer concentrate is being handled. Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz Egypt W-KLE-17 / 08 March 06 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 Andorra 20 July 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Australia 28 June 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Barbados Registration not required 27, 40, 433, 868 Belgium Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Chile 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 40, 433 Denmark Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE20 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Z * optional 391 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 392 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz Germany Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE7519301 29 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Estonia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Finland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 France Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 French Guyana Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Gibraltar Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE13 May 05 (UK) 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 Greece Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 United Kingdom Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 418, 433, 868 Guadeloupe Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Ireland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Iceland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Italy DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15347 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15348 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15350 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15357 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15358 DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15359 27, 40, 433, 868 392 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 393 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz Jordan TRC/LPD/2005/23 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Canary Islands 000438/2005, 000439/2005 000440/2005, 000441/2005 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005, 3 June 2005 27, 40, 433, 868 Croatia SDR 224/06 27, 40, 433, 868 Kuwait 5 October 2005 27, 30, 40, 418, 433, 868 Latvia 2920/O&M/2006 / 26 April 06 27, 40, 433, 868 Lebanon Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Liechtenstein Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Lithuania Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Luxembourg Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE150405/9538 24 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Malta Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Martinique Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Monaco Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 13 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 New Zealand 20 March 06 27, 30, 40, 433 Z * optional 393 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 394 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz The Netherlands Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Norway Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Austria Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Poland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE21 April 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Portugal ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868 Reunion Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Romania Article 6.4 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27, 30, 40, 433, 868 Russia 13 May 05 433 Saudi Arabia 11_02_05/5024-5-6 418, 433 Sweden Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Switzerland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE14357 27 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Slovakia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE Slovak 206/11/2005 4 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Slovenia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 500-1/2005-437 9 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 394 * optional Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 395 Version: 2.9.4 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers* Country Radio registration number Frequency range MHz Spain 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005 000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005 000447/2005 27, 40, 433, 868 South Africa 11 October 2005 27, 40, 433 Syria 279/4/14 / 05 March 06 Czech Republic General Licence GL-30/R/2000 Reg. No. 844 13 May 05 27, 40, 433 Hungary Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 United Arab Emirates 1623/5/10-2/26/76 433 Cyprus Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE5 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868 Z * optional 395 Dateiname: 6515_3416_02_buchblock.pdf; 211_AKB; 2; 5, en-GB mkalafa, 396 preflight 2008-02-29T16:57:07+01:00 - Seite 396 Version: 2.9.4